Omaha, Nebraska - ARC Document Solutions · PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PROJECT DESIGN TEAM - 2 Mechanical/Plumbing Engineer ..... Morrissey Engineering

Pacific Springs Village Patio Homes

Omaha, Nebraska

Project Manual

Date: June 24, 2013 Project No.: 2011.192.01

File No.: 21.5.1

__________________ * The following key represents the team members responsible for preparing individual specification sections:

RDG .......................... RDG Planning & Design EGA ........................... Ehrhart Griffin & Associates (Civil) RDG IA ...................... RDG Planning & Design (Landscaping) TD2 ........................... Thompson, Dreessen & Dorner, Inc. MEP .......................... Morrissey Engineering

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS Prepared

By *

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

RDG Project Design Team .................................................................... 2 Pages

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

RDG 01 10 00 Summary ...................................................................................... 01 10 00-1 through 01 10 00-2 RDG 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures ............................................................... 01 25 00-1 through 01 25 00-3 RDG Substitution Request Form ........................................................... 1 Page RDG 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures ................................................ 01 26 00-1 through 01 26 00-2 RDG 01 29 00 Payment Procedures .................................................................... 01 29 00-1 through 01 29 00-3 RDG 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination ........................................ 01 31 00-1 through 01 31 00-6 RDG 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ................................................................... 01 33 00-1 through 01 33 00-8 RDG Request for Drawings Form .......................................................... 1 Page RDG 01 40 00 Quality Requirements ................................................................... 01 40 00-1 through 01 40 00-7 RDG 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................................ 01 50 00-1 through 01 50 00-6 RDG 01 60 00 Product Requirements .................................................................. 01 60 00-1 through 01 60 00-4 RDG 01 73 00 Execution ...................................................................................... 01 73 00-1 through 01 73 00-5 RDG 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal .......................... 01 74 19-1 through 01 74 19-3 RDG 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures .................................................................... 01 77 00-1 through 01 77 00-5 RDG 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................. 01 78 23-1 through 01 78 23-6 RDG 01 78 39 Project Record Documents ........................................................... 01 78 39-1 through 01 78 39-4 RDG 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training ......................................................... 01 79 00-1 through 01 79 00-3

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS (Not Used)

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

TD2 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................................ 03 30 00-1 through 03 30 00-18

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

RDG 04 21 13 Brick Masonry ............................................................................... 04 21 13-1 through 04 21 13-11 RDG IA 04 41 00 Site Stone Materials ..................................................................... 04 41 00-1 through 04 41 00-4

DIVISION 05 – METALS (Not Used)

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

RDG 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry .......................................................................... 06 10 00-1 through 06 10 00-6 RDG 06 16 00 Sheathing ..................................................................................... 06 16 00-1 through 06 16 00-4 TD2 06 17 53 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses ................................................... 06 17 53-1 through 06 17 53-5 RDG 06 20 13 Exterior Finish Carpentry .............................................................. 06 20 13-1 through 06 20 13-2 RDG 06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry ............................................................... 06 20 23-1 through 06 20 23-4




DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

RDG 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation ........................................................................ 07 21 00-1 through 07 21 00-4 RDG 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles ........................................................................... 07 31 13-1 through 07 31 13-6 RDG Roofing Warranty .......................................................................... 1 Page RDG 07 46 00 Siding ............................................................................................ 07 46 00-1 through 07 46 00-3 RDG 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ..................................................... 07 62 00-1 through 07 62 00-6 RDG 07 71 00 Roof Specialties ............................................................................ 07 71 00-1 through 07 71 00-5 RDG 07 72 00 Roof Accessories .......................................................................... 07 72 00-1 through 07 72 00-3 RDG 07 92 00 Joint Sealants ............................................................................... 07 92 00-1 through 07 92 00-5

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

RDG 08 16 00 Molded Composite Interior Doors ................................................. 08 16 00-1 through 08 16 00-3 RDG 08 52 00 Wood Doors and Windows ........................................................... 08 52 00-1 through 08 52 00-7 RDG 08 71 00 Door Hardware ............................................................................. 08 71 00-1 through 08 71 00-4

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

RDG 09 29 00 Gypsum Board .............................................................................. 09 29 00-1 through 09 29 00-6 RDG 09 30 00 Tiling ............................................................................................. 09 30 00-1 through 09 30 00-5 RDG 09 68 16 Sheet Carpeting ............................................................................ 09 68 16-1 through 09 68 16-3 RDG 09 91 13 Exterior Painting ........................................................................... 09 91 13-1 through 09 91 13-3 RDG 09 91 23 Interior Painting ............................................................................ 09 91 23-1 through 09 91 23-4

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

RDG 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories ......................................... 10 28 00-1 through 10 28 00-2 RDG 10 30 50 Manufactured Fireplaces .............................................................. 10 30 50-1 through 10 30 50-2 RDG 10 91 60 Wire Shelving ............................................................................... 10 91 60-1 through 10 91 60-2

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

RDG 11 31 00 Residential Appliances ................................................................. 11 31 00-1 through 11 31 00-4

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

RDG 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds ............................................................... 12 21 13-1 through 12 21 13-3 RDG 12 35 30 Residential Casework ................................................................... 12 35 30-1 through 12 35 30-3 RDG 12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops ....................................................... 12 36 61-1 through 12 36 61-2

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used)

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (Not Used)




DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION (See Drawings)

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING (See Drawings)

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (See Drawings)

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (See Drawings)

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS (Not Used)

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (Not Used)

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

EGA 31 20 00 Earthwork ..................................................................................... 31 20 00-1 through 31 20 00-8 EGA 31 22 00 Site Preparation ............................................................................ 31 22 00-1 through 31 22 00-2 RDG 31 31 16 Termite Control ............................................................................. 31 31 16-1 through 31 31 16-3

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

RDG IA 32 32 23 Segmental Retaining Walls .......................................................... 32 32 23-1 through 32 32 23-4 RDG IA 32 84 00 Irrigation System ........................................................................... 32 84 00-1 through 32 84 00-9 RDG IA 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses .......................................................................... 32 92 00-1 through 32 92 00-5 RDG IA 32 93 00 Plants ............................................................................................ 32 93 00-1 through 32 93 00-11 RDG IA 32 93 01 Amended Soil ............................................................................... 32 93 01-1 through 32 93 01-2

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES (Not Used)

Professional Seals – End of Project Manual ................................ 1 Page

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PROJECT DESIGN TEAM - 1

PROJECT DESIGN TEAM Owner .................................................... Immanuel

6757 Newport Avenue #200 Omaha, NE 68152 402.829.2915 Contact: Rhonda Distefano

Architect ................................................ RDG Planning & Design 900 Farnam on the Mall, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68102-5089 402.392.0133 Contact: Scott F. Pfeifer, AIA

I, Scott F. Pfeifer, AIA, am the Coordinating Professional on the Pacific Springs Village Patio Homes project.

Civil Engineer ........................................ Ehrhart Griffin & Associates 3552 Farnam Street Omaha, NE 68131 402.561.0631 Contact: Daniel J. Dolezal, P.E.

Landscape Architect .............................. RDG Planning & Design 900 Farnam on the Mall, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68102-5089 402.392.0133 Contacts: Dolores D. Silkworth, P.E. Hans Klein-Hewett, PLA, ASLA (Primary Contact)

Structural Engineer ............................... Thompson, Dreessen & Dorner, Inc. 10836 Old Mill Road Omaha, NE 68154 402.330.8860 Contact: Troy Nissen, P.E.

6/24/2013

6/24/2013

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PROJECT DESIGN TEAM - 2

Mechanical/Plumbing Engineer ............. Morrissey Engineering Roanoke Business Park 4940 North 118 Street Omaha, NE 68164 402.491.4144 Contact: Chris Reed. P.E.

Electrical Engineer ................................ Morrissey Engineering Roanoke Business Park 4940 North 118 Street Omaha, NE 68164 402.491.4144 Contacts: George M. Morrissey, P.E. Kevin Luebbe

General Contractor ................................ The Weitz Company 8715 South 121st Street La Vista, NE 68128 402.502.4003; Fax: 402.592.0015 Contact: Victor Baez, LEED AP, Project Manager [email protected]

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work by Owner. 3. Owner-furnished products. 4. Access to site. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION:

A. Project Identification: Pacific Springs Village Patio Homes.

1. Project Location: West side of South 173rd Plaza, just north of Mason Plaza on the Pacific Springs Village Campus located at 805 South 173rd Court, Omaha, NE 68118.

B. Owner: Immanuel, 6757 Newport Avenue #200, Omaha, Nebraska.

1. Owner's Representative: Rhonda Distefano, Director of Construction, Facilities Management and Environmental Services.

C. Architect: RDG Planning & Design, 900 Farnam on the Mall, Suite 100, Omaha, Nebraska, Scott F. Pfeifer, AIA.

D. Contractor: The Weitz Company, 8715 South 121st Street, La Vista, Nebraska, has been engaged as Contractor for this Project.

1.4 WORK BY OWNER:

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.

1. Furnishing and installation of telephone, computer, and cable television equipment. Rough-ins and cabling are part of the General Construction contract.

C. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) and minor equipment will be supplied and installed by the Owner after completion of the work by the General Contractor.

1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS:

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Telephone equipment. 2. Cable television/data equipment.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE:

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas identified by limits of construction designation on Construction Documents.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, residents, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

3. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS:

A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

B. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted on the Pacific Springs Village campus.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS:

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01 10 00

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS:

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as

applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from

ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.


k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES:

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.


B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product

provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM To: RDG Planning & Design

900 Farnam on the Mall, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68102-5089

Project: Pacific Springs Village – Patio HomesOmaha, Nebraska

Project No.: 2011.192.01 Date Received:

Specification Section Number and Paragraphs:

Drawings and Details Affected:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer:

Product (Model, Pattern, etc.): WHY IS SUBSTITUTION BEING SUBMITTED? (Select One of the Following)

(____) (____) (____) (____)

Voluntary Alternate Specified Product is Not Available – Explain Cost Savings to Owner – Indicate Comparative Cost Analysis Other – Explain

EFFECTS OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION (Answer the Following Questions and Attach Explanations)

Does substitution affect dimensions indicated on the Drawings? (NO) (YES, explain)

Does substitution affect work of other sections? (NO) (YES, explain)

Does substitution require modifications to design, change to Drawings, or revisions to specifications to be incorporated into the project?

(NO) (YES, explain) Attach list of at least three projects where proposed substitution has been used within past 12 months.

Include name, address, and telephone number of Owner and Architect. CONTRACTOR’S / BIDDER’S REPRESENTATION Undersigned accepts responsibility for coordination of proposed substitution and accepts all additional costs resulting from the incorporation of proposed substitution into the project per Section 01 25 00. SUBMITTED BY:

For Architect’s Use: Accepted (___) Not Accepted (___) No Action Required (___) Submission: Incomplete (___) Too Late (___) Reviewed By/Date:Comments

Subcontractor’s Signature and Date:

Contractor’s Signature and Date:

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1

SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK: Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS:

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES: On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE:

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.




PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES:

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Contractor's name and address. c. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of

Applications for Payment and progress reports. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total

cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT:

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.


B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the eighth day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.


H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of

multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the

Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,

fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of

Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.




PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES:

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.


C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS:

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

e. Indicate required installation sequences. f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear

to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.


C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: DWG, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF)

format. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing

coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in this Project Manual.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs):

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.


D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS:

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within seven days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and

its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs.


h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Sustainable design requirements. m. Preparation of record documents. n. Use of the premises. o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. s. Procedures for moisture and mold control. t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. u. Construction waste management and recycling. v. Parking availability. w. Office, work, and storage areas. x. Equipment deliveries and priorities. y. First aid. z. Security. aa. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.


4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.




PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.


1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in Project Manual.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be

transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. Sequentially number transmittal forms within each specification division (i.e., 033000-01, 033000-02, etc.).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.


4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Specification Section number and title. h. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. i. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. j. Related physical samples submitted directly. k. Indication of full or partial submittal. l. Transmittal number. m. Other necessary identification. n. Remarks.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

H. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect’s FTP site specifically established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.


B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.


3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."


K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.


W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES:

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW:

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION:

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.


D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.


request for drawings

To: Telephone Number:

From: Facsimile Number:

Project Name: Pacific Springs Village Patio Homes RDG Project Number: 2011.192.01

Per your request, we will provide electronic files for your convenience and use in the preparation of shop drawings related to the above-noted project, subject to the terms and conditions below.

Drawings or electronic file information requested: [List Drawing Number(s) – Use Additional Sheets if Necessary]

* AGREEMENT *

The electronic files submitted shall be compatible with Revit 2012, on a platform of Windows 7. We make no representation as to the compatibility of these files with your hardware or your software beyond the specified release of the referenced specifications.

Data contained in these electronic files are part of our instruments of service and shall not be used by you or anyone else receiving these data through or from you for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of shop drawings for the above referenced project. Any other use or reuse by you or by others will be at your sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to RDG. Recipient is advised to check all electronic media for computer viruses before loading the files. Recipient is fully responsible for intercepting and disabling viruses, if any, that may be inadvertently transmitted with the electronic files. You agree to make no claim and hereby waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against RDG, our officers, directors, employees, agents or sub-consultants that may arise out of or in connection with your use of the electronic files.

Furthermore, you shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold us harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from your use of these electronic files.

These electronic files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between these electronic files and corresponding hard-copy construction documents. We make no representation regarding the accuracy and completeness of the electronic files you receive. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed or sealed hard-copy construction documents prepared by RDG and the electronic files, the signed or sealed hard-copy construction documents (including modifications) shall govern. You are responsible for determining if any conflict exists. By your use of these electronic files, you are not relieved of your duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including, and without limitation, the need to check, confirm, and coordinate all dimensions and details, take field measurements, verify field conditions and coordinate your work with that of other contractors for the project.

Because information presented on the electronic files can be modified, unintentionally or otherwise, we reserve the right to remove all indicia of ownership and / or involvement from each electronic display, as well as remove extraneous notes and details. A service / preparation fee of $250 (two-hundred fifty dollars) per data request shall be remitted to RDG prior to delivery of electronic files.

Under no circumstances shall delivery of the electronic files for use by you be deemed a sale by us, and we make no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. In no event shall we be liable for any loss of profit or any consequential damages as a result of you use or reuse of these electronic files.

Upon receipt of a signed copy (FAX #402-392-0413), and the service fee (if required), preparation of files will begin. By signing below, I certify that I am authorized to act on the Recipient’s behalf and have read, understand, and accept the conditions of this Agreement.

ACCEPTED BY: Company Name E-Mail Address (Note if e-mail delivery preferred) Typed Name Title Signature Date

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.


H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS:

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.


1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN:

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS:

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract

Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.


B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if

not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.


F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be

employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

J. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.


B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.


3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG:

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION:

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.3 USE CHARGES:

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

B. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.


2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES:

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72

deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT:

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.


C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.


K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:

1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed. 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM. 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 6. Network Connectivity: 02/110BaseT Ethernet. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7, Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista

Business. 8. Productivity Software:

a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher.

9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.

10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION:

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Provide temporary and use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.


F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION:

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

F. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project

site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL:

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.


C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing

the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to

water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL:

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.



A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation

and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and

weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by

Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES:

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.


3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES:

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or

approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered before bid day.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered before bid day.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.


5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS:

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names

and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.



PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.


B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT:

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.


3.4 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease

of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in

unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS:

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.


2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING:

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work

area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.


3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING:

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION:

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA CONSTRUCTION 2011.192.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Recycle: Recovery of construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

D. Salvage: Recovery of construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

E. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN:

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated by the Work.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator.

1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION:

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan

procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL:

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.


3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE:

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.

For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE:

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES:

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.


3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel

of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and

systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES:

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion

inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.


3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST):

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual

walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES:

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING:

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project

site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove

excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting

from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces

of diffusers, registers, and grills.


o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK:

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY:

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.


D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS:

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Gas leak. 3. Water leak. 4. Power failure. 5. Water outage. 6. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS:

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures.


5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.


D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.


F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION:

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39 "Project Record

Documents."

G. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information

recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,

redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.


4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information.

a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that

correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA:

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.


2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS:

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE:

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

1.3 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM:

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.


3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1 TD2

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section “Building Earthwork” for fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Civil Specification Sections for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Division 9 Architectural sections relating to floor finishes on concrete subfloors. Contractor to

coordinate moisture levels with flooring suppliers prior to installations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. 2006 International Building Code. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 3. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials". 4. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 5. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." 6. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete" 7. ACI 305 "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting" 8. ACI 306 "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" 9. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Form-work" 10. ACI 302.1R “Concrete Floor and Slab Construction, Flatness/Levelness Typical Use Guide.

B. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of a "Special Inspector" as required by Section 1704 of the 2006 International Building Code and as indicated on the drawings. In general, the Special Inspector shall provide periodic inspection to observe the work and insure its conformance with the plans and specifications. Specific services shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Inspection of reinforcement. 2. Inspection during the taking of test specimens. 3. Inspection during placement of concrete for the items noted above.


The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector at least 48 hours prior to requirement of inspection. The contractor shall cooperate with the special inspector and shall not proceed with work until all special inspections have been successfully completed. The Special Inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the owner and copy the architect and the contractor.

C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

D. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS:

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.


I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT:

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 , deformed bars; ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES:

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS:

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray.

B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.


C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class ‘3S’ coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: see Structural Drawings. 2. Course Aggregate: Limestone. 3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330, see Structural Drawings for maximum aggregate size.

E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

F. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C

2.5 ADMIXTURES:

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS:

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

F. Clear, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS:

A. Slab-on-grade Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed or uncrushed gravel, or manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve, less than 40% passing the No. 40 sieve, and less than 5 percent passing a No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

B. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.


C. Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 or better per ASTM D 2240.

D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types I and II for non-load bearing and IV and V for load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

F. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

G. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

H. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, with a permeance of less than 0.01 perms after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E 1745 (7.1.1 – 7.1.5), not less than 15 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape.

I. Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621 and ASTM C 1107, factory pre-mixed grout.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL:

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent of Portland cement content by weight.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

D. See Structural Drawings for 28-day concrete compressive strength, slump, & air entrainment requirements for various building elements.

1. Slump limits noted on the plans are for concrete prior to adding high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer).

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT: Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."


2.10 CONCRETE MIXING:

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.11 FORM MATERIALS:

A. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as

follows:

a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

F. Form Ties factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.

1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in the concrete surface.

2.12 REINFORCING MATERIALS:

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M Grade 400), deformed. ASTM A706, Grade 60 where welding of reinforcing is required. Epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A775, where required.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, flat sheet type welded steel wire fabric.

C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).


2.13 CONCRETE MATERIALS:

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. Provide aggregate size as shown on the Drawings.

1. Coarse and Fine aggregates shall not contain any materials that may cause excessive expansion due to alkali-aggregate reaction.

2. Coarse aggregate for exterior exposed surfaces shall be limestone. 3. Coarse aggregate for concrete slabs on metal deck shall be limestone.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

H. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type C or E.

J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B or D.

2.14 RELATED MATERIALS:

A. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand.

B. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to ASTM E 154, as manufactured by STEGO Industries, 1-877-464-7834 as follows:

1. For slabs on grade to receive wood, sheet rubber or vinyl, or membrane finish flooring, provide 15 mil STEGO Wrap Vapor Barrier. For all other slabs on grade, provide 10 mil STEGO Wrap Vapor Retarder. Coordinate requirements with architectural room finishes.

C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m), complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

E. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. m when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.


F. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

G. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate (Interior use only) or acrylic base.

H. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.

I. Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout.

2.15 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES:

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing. 2. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by weight.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with properties as indicated on drawings and schedules.

D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site-verified 2-to-3 inch slump concrete.

2. Other concrete: As noted on the drawings.

E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.

2.16 ADMIXTURES:

A. Admixtures shall meet the requirements of the Specifications.

B. Combination of admixtures in a particular mix is identified as a separate mix design.

C. Admixtures and combination of admixtures are used in strict accordance with all manufacturer’s written recommendations.

D. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

E. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed against ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C).

F. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content of 5 to 7 percent.


2.17 CONCRETE MIXING:

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 and as specified.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (29 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL: Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.2 FORMWORK:

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.


3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS:

A. General: Prior to placement of concrete, place and secure anchorage bolts, devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS:

A. General: Forms may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) as follows:

1. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed up to 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

2. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved 100 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength, but not less than 96 hours after placing concrete.

3. Form-facing material that supports the weight of concrete may be removed after the concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength, but in no case less than 48 hours after placing concrete, if shores that are supporting the concrete weight have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing materials without loosening or disturbing the shores.

4. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by the Architect.

3.5 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION:

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Place the vapor retarder with respect to a granular fill layer in accordance with ACI 302, or as specified on the Drawings.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT:

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.

1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and concreteing operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.


D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.7 JOINTS:

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Do not continue reinforcement through both sides of temporary concrete pour strips in slabs without a lap or other splice to permit shrinkage of concrete.

3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in approximately the quarter to third points of

spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of concrete column capitals, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

6. Locate vertical joints in walls beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. Locate as indicated on the shop drawings for exposed concrete walls.

7. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated on the Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-third of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete as soon as cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.


3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that the required Special Inspections have been performed and any discrepancies have been corrected and re-inspected.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

1. Where approved, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 before test sampling and placing concrete.

2. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at

uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane,

before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.


3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES:

A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth-formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form removal.

1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS:

A. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 1 direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated to receive concrete floor toppings and mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 20; and of levelness, F(L) 15.


D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

F. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive finish where indicated. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to surfaces where indicated. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non-shrink grout. Use non-metallic grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING:

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.


E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces

and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Use only where compatible with appearance requirements and with finishes. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use only on interior floors and slabs that will remain permanently exposed to view. Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.13 JOINT FILLING:

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.


3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by

cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.


E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a Special Inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts, studs, and other embedded structural steel items. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. 7. Embedded items, such as conduits, sleeves, or box-outs, for conformance to the requirements on

the Structural Drawings. 8. Other work that may be indicated on the plans or required by others.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure three standard cylinder specimens. b. Cast and field cure specimens as required for determination of formwork removal.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M

a. Test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. The 28-day compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from

the set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample.


8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 BRICK MASONRY 04 21 13 - 1

SECTION 04 21 13 - BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Face brick. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Ties and anchors. 4. Embedded flashing. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 3. Weep holes and vents. 4. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

2. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 3. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

B. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.


B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area. 2. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 96

inches long by 72 inches high by full thickness, including accessories.

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup. b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall

mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).

c. Include wood studs, sheathing, building wrap, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in mockup.

3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and

sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.

6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.



A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure

cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral

finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing

mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL:

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

2.2 BRICK:

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units.

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.


B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216 or hollow brick complying with ASTM C 652, Class H40V (void areas between 25 and 40 percent of gross cross-sectional area).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Robinson Brick; Modular, Georgetown, to match existing patio homes.

2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX 4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not

effloresced." 5. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS:

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from Portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Ash Grove; Pro Mortar. 2) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color. 3) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. 4) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond Portland & Lime. 5) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement. 6) United Cement Products, color to be "Ginger".

2. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

3. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of Portland cement by weight.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.


2.4 REINFORCEMENT:

A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS:

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10-X.

b. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 3-5/8 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.

c. Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with screw holes top and bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs of length to match thickness of insulation or sheathing; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 6 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and extend beyond pronged legs.

d. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-inch-thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

e. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS:

A. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.


a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing.

2. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick.

B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing.

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES:

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

C. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents.

D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.


a. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. c. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

2. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.

b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.

c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. d. Sheets or strips not less than 1 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity with

additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.


2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS:

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.9 MORTAR MIXES:

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Use Portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,

regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.


3.3 TOLERANCES:

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch; do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS:

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.


3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING:

A. Lay hollow brick as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS:

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.

3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches o.c.

horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.

3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS:

A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for

installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS:

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.


B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

6. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes formed from wicking material 16 inches o.c. 3. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.

E. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches, to maintain drainage.

F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

G. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING:

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.


D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL:

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste.

Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SITE STONE MATERIALS 04 41 00 - 1 RDG IA: 2011.505.02

SECTION 04 41 00 – SITE STONE MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes

1. Dry placed LIMESTONE BLOCK WALL. 2. This section includes the specifications for LIMESTONE and limestone accessories. 3. Cast-in-place concrete footings, steel reinforcing, and all limestone construction accessories are

incidental work to the construction of the LIMESTONE specified in this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and applicable requirements of local governing authorities.

B. Perform work in accordance with ILI.

C. Installation: Performed only by experienced stone wall builders with satisfactory record of performance on completed projects of comparable size and quality.

D. Provide all limestone from one quarry to ensure consistent color range and texture.

E. Do not change source or brands of materials during the course of the work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for stone and accessories required.

B. Limestone block wall: Samples required; include the color and texture proposed for the work.

C. Shop drawings for stone accessories required.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stone: Deliver, store, and handle limestone materials in accordance with stone suppliers recommendations.

1. When blocking and packing use non-staining materials. 2. Protect stone from damage and soiling.

B. Stone Accessories: Deliver, store, and handle masonry accessories to prevent weather damage and deterioration.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not use metal accessories with loose coatings, including ice, which will reduce bond.

B. Protect partially completed limestone work against weather damage and moisture, when work is not in progress. Cover tops of limestone with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane.


C. Cold Weather Construction:

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2. Do not build on frozen ground or frozen work. Remove and replace stonework damaged by frost or

freezing.

D. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, and staining during masonry work operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIMESTONE BLOCK WALL

A. Quarry / Fabricator: US Stone Industries, Herington, KS – Top Ledge Cottonwood or approved equal.

B. Limestone Standards:

1. Native Kansas limestone -- min. 55% calcium carbonate as CaCo3. 2. Compressive strength (ASTM C170 - 50).

a. Minimum - 6500 psi. b. Average - 7500 psi.

3. Absorption (ASTM C97 - 47) -- maximum 5.0%.

C. Color:

1. “Buff” color

D. Surface Finish:

1. One face split/natural, other faces sawn or drilled

E. Sizes: 18” tall, 18”-36” in depth, 3-5’ lengths

F. Grade/Quality: Standard.

G. Provide sound limestone uniform in color and texture, free from mineral stains, other foreign matter, and defects detrimental to appearance and durability.

H. Color range, texture, and finish of limestone shall be within range of Landscape Architect’s accepted samples.

2.2 LIMESTONE SHIMS

A. Furnish and set to maintain level lines.

B. Hard plastic or stainless steel: AISI Type 304

2.3 GRANULAR LIMESTONE BASE

A. Fine Limestone: IA DOT 4117.03.

B. Base dimensions as specified on the drawings.


2.4 STAINLESS STEEL ACCESSORIES

A. Stainless steel pins – AISI Type 304.

2.5 GRANULAR LIMESTONE BASE

A. Gradation as specified on the Drawings.

B. Base dimensions as specified on the drawings.

2.6 STEEL REINFORCING

A. Sizes as shown on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Examine substrates and installation conditions.

B. Examine subgrade grade and confirm granular base is level.

C. Do not start construction until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing.

B. Do not use stone units with unacceptable chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other visible defects as determined by the Landscape Architect.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LIMESTONE BLOCK WALL

A. Construct concrete footings and granular limestone bases in accordance with the material specifications and details shown on the drawings

B. Set and anchor limestone and granite boulder units in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.

C. Shim for proper setting of Limestone and Granite Boulders.

D. Erect stones plumb and true with joints widths and alignments as shown on the drawings.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation in Joint Thickness: Do not exceed joint thickness indicated on the Drawings by more than plus or minus 1/8”.

B. Lay Limestone units dry and shim to establish minimum joint thickness.

3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR (Prior to Substantial Completion)

A. Remove and replace limestone units that are loose, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged. Provide new matching units, install as specified.

B. Upon completion of the work, remove from site all excess materials, debris, tools, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from stone masonry work operations.


C. Final Cleaning: After thoroughly set, clean masonry as follows:

1. Remove adhering soil particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample; obtain Landscape Architect’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

4. Saturate surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Wood blocking and nailers. 5. Wood furring. 6. Wood sleepers. 7. Utility shelving. 8. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Sustainability Submittals:

1. Product Data: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data: For composite-wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no

urea formaldehyde.



A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL:

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture

content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER:

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.


C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING:

A. Conventional framing lumber shall be grade stamped by the Western Wood Products Association or an agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee and shall be manufactured in accordance with Product Standard PS 20-70, as published by the Department of Commerce. Framing lumber shall have a maximum moisture content of 19 percent and shall be marked with the indication "S-DRY" on the grade stamp.

B. Grading, strength and stiffness properties for all framing lumber shall meet or exceed the minimum design values given in the 2005 National Design Specification Supplement for the grades and species shown on the Structural Drawings.

2.4 ENGINEERED LUMBER (LVL): Engineered lumber shall meet the minimum base design values given on the Structural Drawings.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS:

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS:

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.


2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

D. Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation: Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or herein, all wood framing shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 23, Section 2304 of the 2009 International Building Code.

B. Fastenings: Except as noted otherwise on the Drawings, connect wood members using (as a minimum) the number and size of nails set forth in Table 2304.9.I of the 2009 International Building Code.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

D. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

E. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.

H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.


2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal-thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.

K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

M. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION:

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION:

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 24 inches o.c.

C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.

3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION:

A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated.

1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal-size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- or 2-by-4-inch nominal-size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.

B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions.


C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width.

3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION:

A. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers.

1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters.

2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter.

B. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if any.

3.6 PROTECTION: Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 1

SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Building wrap. 4. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 4. For building wrap, include data on air-moisture-infiltration protection based on testing according to

referenced standards.


A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Building wrap.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS:

A. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.


C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD:

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 WALL SHEATHING:

A. APA Rated Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch. 3. Nominal Size: 48 x 96 inches.

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING:

A. APA Rated Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch. 3. Nominal Size: 48 x 96 inches.

2.5 FASTENERS:

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

2.6 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER:

A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. DuPont (E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek Housewrap.


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 125 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).

3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.

B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).


a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing: CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus

Self-Adhered Flashing.

C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

D. Coordinate wall roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION:

A. Install roof sheathing with longer edge (strength axis) perpendicular to framing members and with ends staggered and sheet ends over bearing. Provide blocking at all unsupported panel edges. See the Structural Drawings for additional requirements.

B. Install wall sheathing with long dimension either perpendicular or parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing. See the Structural Drawings for additional requirements.


C. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required.

D. See Structural Drawings for sheathing attachment requirements.

3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER:

A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

3.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING:

A. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

B. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.

C. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53 - 1 TD2

SECTION 06 17 53 – SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Wood roof systems.

B. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing.

C. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.

1.3 REFERENCES:

A. 2006 International Building Code.

B. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.

C. AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."

D. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction."

E. TPI 2, “Standard for Testing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.”

F. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

G. TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit “Erection Drawings” and “Individual Truss Designs” that contain the following information:

1. Erection Drawings with the following information:

a. Dimensional layout and identification of each truss corresponding to the “Individual Truss Designs”.

b. Sequence and procedure of installation. c. All truss-to-truss connections indicating mechanical connector to be used along with

corresponding load. d. Location and details for installing all bracing required to reduce the buckling length of

individual truss members. Bracing may be either “T” bracing or continuous lateral bracing. Continuous lateral bracing shall be stabilized by diagonal bracing in the plane of the truss member being braced.


2. Individual Truss Design: The truss design shall be identified with the same mark used in the “Erection Drawings”. The individual truss design shall contain the following information:

a. Design and fabrication data; b. Metal connectors-gauge-sizes of connectors-name of manufacturer; c. Lumber specifications; d. Pitch, span, and spacing of trusses; e. Design loadings and allowable unit stress increase, if any; f. Size and location of all connector plates; g. Support reactions and connection to concrete to be used; h. Camber, if any; i. Location of permanent bracing required to reduce buckling length of individual truss

members. j. Handling and erection instruction.

3. An engineer registered in the State of Nebraska shall design all trusses. Individual truss designs shall be signed and sealed by the same engineer.


A. All materials, engineering, fabrication, and installation shall be in conformance with the 2006 International Building Code.

B. Connector Plate Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide truss connector plates manufactured by a firm which is a member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

C. Fabricator's Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect/Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Exception: If the fabricator does not participate in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection at time of bid, the fabricator shall pay for an independent special inspector approved by the Architect to provide in-plant special inspections as required by Section 1704 of the 2006 International Building Code.


A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.

1.7 COORDINATION: Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Dimension Lumber:

1. All lumber used shall be identified by the grade mark of a lumber inspection bureau or agency approved under the 2006 IBC.

2. The design of trusses shall be based on the properties of the lumber used. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. 5. Roof Truss Chords:

a. Single top and bottom chord. b. Finger scarfing not permitted. c. Minimum top chord size shall be 2x6 and minimum bottom chord size shall be 2x4.

B. Metal Connector Plates:

1. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer. 2. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. 3. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-

alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

a. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 DESIGN

A. Design by Manufacturer: Trusses shall be designed by connector-plate manufacturer to support all superimposed dead and live loads indicated on the Drawings, with design approved and certified by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where trusses will be installed.

1. Prefabricated wood trusses and connections thereof shall be designed in accordance with the American Forest and Paper Association and the Truss Plate Institute Design Specification for Metal Plate.

B. Compression chord braces, other braces, bridging, or any other members or connectors required to assure proper performance of the wood roof system are to be included in the design, fabrication, and erection of the system.

1. Where bracing is required to reduce the buckling length of individual truss members, the truss manufacturer is responsible to design the bracing and connections. Bracing may be either “T” bracing or continuous lateral bracing. Continuous lateral bracing shall be stabilized by diagonal bracing in the plane of the truss member being braced. All bracing and details shall be shown on the truss shop drawings.

2.3 FABRICATION:

A. All trusses and other roof and floor structural components shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing facility of a permanent nature. Experienced workmen, using precision cutting and fabricating equipment, under the direct supervision of a qualified foreman shall manufacture trusses. All trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules of inspection and quality control as the local code may require and open to inspection by the Architect or others at all times.

B. All truss members shall be accurate cut to length, angle, size, and true to lines to produce tight-fitting joints for finished members.


C. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.

D. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.

1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.

E. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.

F. All members and connector plates shall be accurately placed in special jigs and the members tightly clamped in place; remaining in that position until the connector plates have been pressed into the lumber simultaneously on both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.

G. No open joints which depend on the stiffness of the metal connector plate to transmit stresses or improperly fitting joints will be permitted.

H. Camber shall be built into the trusses, as noted on the approved shop drawings, by properly positioning the members in the fabricating jig.

I. Each member shall be permanently stamped with the name and address of the fabricator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION: Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.

3.2 PREPARATION: Coordinate placement of support items.

3.3 ERECTION:

A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured

B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.

C. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.

E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction

F. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.

G. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

H. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.


I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.

1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry”. 2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at

centers indicated.

J. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.

K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.

1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by Architect/Engineer.

L. Place headers and supports to frame openings required.

M. Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Division 06 "Rough Carpentry”.

N. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this section.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 1

SECTION 06 20 13 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS:

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL: Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.


A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.

1. For face-fastening siding, provide ringed-shank siding nails or hot-dip galvanized-steel siding nails. 2. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face fastening is

required. 3. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized-steel fasteners.

B. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION: Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry.

3.4 ADJUSTING: Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.5 PROTECTION:

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.




PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 - 1

SECTION 06 20 23 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes interior trim.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL:

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber."

2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress."

3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber." 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine

Lumber." 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast

Lumber." 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules."


B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.

E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

F. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2.2 INTERIOR TRIM:

A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):

1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, D Select; NeLMA or NLGA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Allowed. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 5. Optional Material: Primed MDF of same actual dimensions as lumber indicated may be used in

lieu of lumber.

2.3 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS:

A. Closet Shelving: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch thick.

1. Particleboard with solid-wood front edge. 2. MDF with solid-wood front edge. 3. Melamine-faced particleboard with applied-PVC front edge.


A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

B. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION:

A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work:

1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.

B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated.

3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.

3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION:

A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.

1. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 2. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting.

Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

3.5 ADJUSTING: Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.


3.6 CLEANING: Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.

3.7 PROTECTION:

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.




PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Loose-fill insulation. 4. Vapor retarders.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site

before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION:

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.


a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products.

2. Type IV, 25 psi.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.


2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

1. Thermal Resistance: R of 19 at exterior walls. 2. Size:

a. Wood Sills: One inch. b. Exterior Walls: 5-1/2 inch thickness.

C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.

D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

2.3 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION:

A. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. Provide thickness required for R value of 38.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS:

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils and 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.

1. Install 6 mils at all exterior wall and attic ceiling locations. 2. Install 10 mils at all interior slab-on-grade locations.

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

C. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION: Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION:

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units loosely laid according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION:

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:

a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.

D. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.


E. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS:

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.

1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

3.6 PROTECTION: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 1

SECTION 07 31 13 - ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment.

1.3 DEFINITION:

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.



B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected:

1. Asphalt Shingle: Full size. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. 3. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft of each type, in unbroken bundles.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles, felt underlayment, and self-adhering sheet underlayment from single source from single manufacturer.



A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.

1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.

B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

1.11 WARRANTY:

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Manufacturing defects. b. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a reasonable time.

2. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first three years nonprorated.

3. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds up to 100 mph for five years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Project Warranty: Roofing Installer's Warranty, or warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering the Work of this Section, in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt shingle roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES:

A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Timberline Prestique 30 as manufactured by GAF (Elk) Material Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Owens Corning. c. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc.

2. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Color and Blends: Weathered Wood.

B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Site-fabricated units cut from asphalt shingle strips. Trim each side of lapped portion of unit to taper approximately 1 inch.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS:

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Minimum of 30- to 40-mil-thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.

C. Granular-Surfaced Valley Lining: ASTM D 3909, mineral-granular-surfaced, glass-felt-based, asphalt roll roofing; 36 inches wide.

2.3 ACCESSORIES:

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch-diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch-diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing.

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.

C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter.

2.4 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM:

A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Sheet Metal: Zinc-tin alloy-coated steel.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item.

1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 4 inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface.

2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 4 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface.


3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 18 inches beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of chimney and 6 inches above the roof plane.

4. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof-deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge.

C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof, and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION:

A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment (Roof Slopes of 4:12 or Greater): Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails.

1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet underlayment.

2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch o.c.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.

1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 6. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches, and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4

inches. 7. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope.


D. Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of 36-inch-wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches. Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with roofing nails.

1. Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches.

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface.

C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only.

D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side.

E. Open-Valley Flashings: Install centered in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof deck beneath overlap.

1. Adhere 9-inch-wide strip of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to self-adhering sheet underlayment.

F. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.

G. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing.

H. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.


D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of four roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

E. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point.

1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open-valley flashings.

F. Ridge Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.


7/03

ROOFING WARRANTY Owner Address Project Project Address Date of Final Acceptance Prime Contractor Roofing Contractor Address Address Phone Number Phone Number This warranty stipulates that the above-named Contractor shall, during a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance of the work, maintain the roof membrane and flashing systems in a watertight condition and repair all defects which result from faulty workmanship or defective materials, without further cost to the Owner, including replacement of any wet insulation caused by such defects.

Excluded from this warranty may be any and all damage to said roof, the buildings or their contents caused by acts or omissions of the Owner; fire, lightning, winds of peak gust speeds of 72 mph or higher, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomenon of the elements; movement or failure of the supporting building structure that causes membrane or flashing failure; or vapor condensation beneath the roof.

Exclude from this warranty any damages to the building structure or the interior contents.

Before expiration of the above warranty period, the Roofing Contractor shall inspect the roof in the presence of the Owner and make necessary correction of all deficiencies not considered normal. The warranty shall remain in force until the necessary repair work has been done.

PRIME CONTRACTOR ROOFING CONTRACTOR Signed Signed Title Title Date Date OWNER ACCEPTANCE Signed Title Date

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SIDING 07 46 00 - 1

SECTION 07 46 00 - SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Fiber-cement siding. 2. Related trim, flashings, accessories, and fastenings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of siding, from manufacturer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber-cement siding.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding and related accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish full lengths of siding including related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed.


A. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain siding, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.

1.9 COORDINATION: Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.


1.10 WARRANTY:

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including cracking, deforming, and fading. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 50 Number of years from date of Substantial Completion.

a. Lap and Vertical Siding: 50 years. b. Trim: 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING:

A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide James Hardie Building Products; HardiPlank Siding, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp. b. GAF Materials Corporation.

2. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 5-1/4 inches wide.

a. Texture: Wood grain. b. Exposure: 4 inches. c. Length: 12 feet minimum, primed panels.

3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.

2.2 ACCESSORIES:

A. Aluminum Accessories: Where aluminum accessories are indicated, provide accessories complying with AAMA 1402.

1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.024 inch. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer and baked-on acrylic.

B. Trim Materials: Fiber-cement in 3/4-inch and 1-inch depths.

C. Flashing: Provide 26 gauge galvanized steel. Insert metal flashing complying with Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

D. Fasteners:

1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.

2. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding and related accessories.


3.2 PREPARATION: Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install flashing around all wall openings.

B. Install fiber-cement siding and related accessories.

1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c.

C. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.

1. Allow 1/8-inch gap between trim and siding. 2. Seal gap with high quality, paintable caulk.

D. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed equipment support flashing.

1.3 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 3. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 4. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners,

cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 5. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 6. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of

expansion and contraction from fixed points. 7. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 8. Include details of special conditions. 9. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 10. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.



A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS:

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (For all flashing not exposed to view): Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester

backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.


A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.


a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Ultra. c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip

galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 4. Fasteners for Zinc Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.


D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL:

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on

faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.




A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch ( deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.


2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES:

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00 - 1

SECTION 07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Copings. 2. Roof-edge flashings. 3. Roof-edge drainage systems.


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS:

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A

755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.


2.2 CONCEALED METALS:

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.


A. Felt: See Division 07 Section "Asphalt Shingles."

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: See Division 07 Section "Asphalt Shingles."

C. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip

zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

D. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 COPINGS:

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.

1. Coping-Cap Material: Zinc-coated steel, nominal 0.034-inch thickness.

a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: White.

2. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

3. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.

4. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.


2.6 ROOF-EDGE FLASHINGS:

A. Drip-Edge: Manufactured lengths not exceeding 12 feet, 0.028 inch thick, minimum.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: Match roof edge drainage system.

2. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched.

2.7 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS:

A. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal:

a. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.034-inch thickness.

2. Gutter Profile: Style K according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," 5-inches wide by 3-3/4-inches deep.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Gutter Supports: Spikes and ferrules with finish matching the gutters.

B. Downspouts: Corrugated rectangular complete with machine-crimped elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. Size to be 2-3/4-inches by 4-1/4-inches. Provide a 5-foot extension on the end of each downspout.

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.034-inch thickness.

C. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

1. Color: As selected to match existing patio homes.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS:

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.


C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water. Overlap edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches.

D. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and

dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.


D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.4 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION:

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

3.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 1

SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes gravity ventilators.


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

C. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.


2.2 GRAVITY VENTILATORS:

A. Continuous Soffit Vents (CSV): Aluminum, non-powered, hat-channel shape, with stamped louvers; 2 3/4 inches wide and not less than 96 inches long similar to Lomanco Vents Model #105 or approved equal.

B. Roof Vents (RV): Non-powered, square, galvanized construction, self flashing, suitable for installation on pitched roofs, black factory finish. Provide 144 square inches minimum free area. Model 5-144BK by Leigh Ventilation Products, Coopersville, MI. or approved equal. Locations shown on roof plan.

C. Continuous Ridge Vents (CRV): Provide Ridge Master Plus roof vents as manufactured by Mid America Building Products or similar products from manufacturer below.

1. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. High Point, Series 5, by North American Building Products. b. Ridge Filter Shingle Vent by Air Vent, Inc.

2. Include weather filter and end plugs as required. 3. Minimum Net Free Area: 12.229 square inches minimum free area per lineal foot.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete

installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening

of fasteners and seals.


B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Gravity Ventilator Installation: Verify that gravity ventilators operate properly and have unrestricted airflow. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanisms.

D. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING:

A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Acoustical joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.


1. Product Data: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 5. Joint-sealant substrate preparation and limitations.



B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.



A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications

indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL:

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS:

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant (JS-A): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, designed based on Silicone II as manufactured by General Electric for general caulking or comparable product by one of the following: :

a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. Tremco Incorporated.

B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant (JS-B): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT (counter tops and bath fixtures).


a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.


c. GE Advanced Materials, Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS:

A. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant (JS-C): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T (concrete paving).


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 950. c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS:

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant (JS-D): Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING:

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS:

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace

them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.


E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING: Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION: Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE:

A. Sidewalk Joints JS-C Grey

B. Window Perimeter JS-A Match Window

C. Door Frame/Walls JS-A Match Door Frame

D. Under Thresholds JS-A Black

E. Counter Tops JS-B Match Counter Top Color

F. Bath Fixtures/Ceramic Tile JS-B White

G. As Specified or Denoted JS-D --


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA MOLDED 2011.192.01 COMPOSITE INTERIOR DOORS 08 16 00 - 1

SECTION 08 16 00 – MOLDED COMPOSITE INTERIOR DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: Molded wood composite doors for interior use.

A. Passage doors.

B. Bifold and Pocket doors.

1.3 REFERENCES:

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL10B: Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Note: Neutral pressure testing standard.) 2. UL10C: Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC), CAN4-S104: Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

E. Uniform Building Code Standard 7-2 (UBC):

1. UBC 7-2 (1994): Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. (Note: Neutral pressure testing standard.) 2. UBC 7-2 (1997): Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. (Note: Positive pressure testing standard.)

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Fire door assemblies shall meet or exceed fire-protection ratings indicated when tested in accordance with NFPA 252.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. Comply with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.

C. Certificate of Compliance: Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance indicating composite doors comply with specified requirements.

D. Application: Submit manufacturer’s application instructions

E. Closeout Submittals: Refer to Division 01 Section “Closeout Submittals.”



A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.7 WARRANTY:

A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.”

B. Warranty: Provide 5-year material warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER:

A. CMI, 500 West Monroe Street, Suite 2010, Chicago, Illinois 60661. Toll Free (800) 405-2233. Fax (312) 382-8703. Website www.craftmasterdoors.com. E-mail [email protected].

B. Basis of Design: Doors are based on CraftMaster molded interior doors, Carrara.

2.2 PASSAGE DOORS:

A. Door Design:

1. Surface Finish: Smooth. 2. Panels and Profile: Carrara, 6’-8” height, two-panel, square top.

B. Core and Frame:

1. Hollow core, 1-3/8-inch thick. 2. Solid core, 1-3/4-inch thick, with 20-minute fire rating.

C. Jambs: Refer to the door unit manufacturer.

D. Hardware: Refer to the hardware provider.

E. Finish:

1. Primed with a low VOC primer.

a. Paint doors in accordance with manufacturer’s finishing recommendations.

2.3 BIFOLD AND POCKET DOORS:

A. Door Design:

1. Surface Finish: Smooth. 2. Panels and Profile: Carrara, 6’8” height, six-panel, square top.

B. Core: Hollow core, 1-3/8-inches thick.

C. Hardware: Refer to the hardware provider.


D. Finish:

1. Primed with a low VOC primer.

a. Paint doors in accordance with manufacturer’s finishing recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL: Install doors in accordance with the door unit manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3.2 EXAMINATION:

A. Inspect door unit prior to installation.

B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with the door unit manufacturer’s recommendations. Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances.

3.3 PREPARATION:

A. Prepare door for installation in accordance with door unit manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Trim bottom of jamb sides to achieve desired distance between door bottom and finished floor height.

3.4 PASSAGE DOOR INSTALLATION:

A. Place door unit into opening and level hinge side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to level and temporarily secure in place.

B. Level latch side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to level and temporarily secure in place.

C. Verify spacing between jamb and door is uniform on all sides. Adjust as necessary.

D. Shim top of jamb in center of opening and fasten with nail.

E. Re-check for square, level and even spacing around door. Nail securely in place through stop, jamb, shims and into studs every 12 inches.

F. Set nails.

G. Install trim on both sides using nails every 12 to 16 inches.

3.5 BIFOLD DOOR INSTALLATION:

A. Attach door hardware to door.

B. Attach jamb hardware.

1. Fasten overhead track in center of finished opening by inserting screws through pre-drilled holes. 2. Attach jamb brackets flush to finished floor in line with overhead track.

C. Install door assemblies.

1. Place pivot pin in hole at top corner bracket and place guide wheel in track. 2. Lift door assembly and drop bottom pin into bottom bracket hole.

D. Check positioning and operation. Adjust hardware if necessary.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 WOOD DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 1

SECTION 08 52 00 - WOOD DOORS AND WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes fixed operable wood-framed windows of the following type:

1. Aluminum clad wood windows with fixed and operating sash, factory glazed, operating hardware, and insect screens.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:

1. R: Residential.

B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:

1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure.

C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure.

D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:

1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Glazing details. 7. Window cleaning provisions.

C. Samples for Verification: Aluminum cladding colors.

D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of wood window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.


G. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping, and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Provide WDMA-certified wood windows with an attached label.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 WARRANTY:

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or

condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal

weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.


2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pella Corporation's "Proline" aluminum clad wood door and window units or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Door and Window Units:

a. Andersen Windows & Doors. b. Marvin Windows and Doors. c. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated.

B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard formed sheet or extruded-aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength.

1. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

3. Baked-Enamel Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603 and paint manufacturer's written specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

a. Color: Putty.

C. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members.

D. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Clad-wood material and finish to match clad frame members.

E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.


F. Anchors, Nail Fins, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when wood window is closed.

1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

I. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702.

1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702.

J. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702.

2.3 DOORS AND WINDOWS:

A. Window Type: Casement and fixed as shown on Drawings.

B. Door Type: In-swing patio door as shown on Drawings.

C. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood doors and windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

1. Performance Class and Grade: R45.

D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood doors and windows with a whole-unit, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to NFRC 100.

1. U-Factor: 0.30 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less.

E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood doors and windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.270, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.

F. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test.

1. Maximum Rate: 0.05 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test.

1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. or more than 15 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Life-Cycle Testing: Test according to AAMA 910 and comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

I. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated.


2.4 GLAZING:

A. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 5/8" inch. 2. Thickness of each Glass Lite: 3.0 mm. 3. Indoor/Outdoor Lite: Float glass (tempered where required by code). 4. Interspace Content: Air Argon. 5. Provide safety glazing labeling at required locations.

2.5 HARDWARE:

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide satin nickel finish.

B. Gear-Type Rotary Window Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A.

2.6 INSECT SCREENS:

A. General: Design operable windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.

1. Screen Types: Full.

B. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656.

1. Mesh Color: Match existing patio homes.

2.7 ACCESSORIES:

A. Dividers (Grills between the Glass - GBG's): Provide dividers as shown on Drawings.

2.8 FABRICATION:

A. Fabricate wood doors and windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Factory machine doors and windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied.

D. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze wood doors and windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.


2.9 INTERIOR WOOD FINISHES:

A. Factory-Finished Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard factory finish complying with WDMA T.M. 12. Apply finish to exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces.

1. Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation.

1. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B. Install doors and windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Install doors and windows to be weather-tight and freely operating.

D. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets for weathertight construction.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action (dissimilar materials, treated lumber, etc.) at points of contact with other materials.

F. For fin method of attachment, integrate window system installation with exterior weather-resistant barrier using flashing/sealant tape. Apply and integrate flashing/sealant tape with weather-resistant barrier using watershed principles in accordance with window manufacturer's instructions.

G. Place interior seal around door and window perimeter using insulating foam sealant to maintain continuity of building thermal and air barrier.

H. Seal door and window to exterior wall cladding with sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly.

I. Leave door and window units closed and locked.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION:

A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing doors and windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.


C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing doors and windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

E. Protect door and window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

1.3 COORDINATION:

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE:

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function.

2.2 FABRICATION:

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.


C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FINISHES:

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with governing regulations.

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

3.3 ADJUSTING:

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


3.4 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. FURNISH ALL ITEMS IN US15 (619) SATIN NICKEL FINISH UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

B. LEGEND:

Manufacturers: Approved Equal: Item:

HAGER STANLEY, MCKINNEY HINGES, L E JOHNSON STANLEY POCKET, BIFOLD TRACK

SCHLAGE NO SUBSTITUTE LOCKS IVES ROCKWOOD, HAGER STOPS, VIEWER

KWIKSET NO SUBSTITUTE POCKET DOOR LATCH HAFELE BIFOLD PULLS

C. HARDWARE SETS:

1. HARDWARE SET NO. 1: EXTERIOR ENTRY DOOR

3 EACH HINGES CP3535 894252 619 1 EACH KEYED ENTRY LOCK F51 918056 619 1 EACH DEADBOLT B60N 913114 619 1 EACH VIEWER 190D 874288 619 (AT DOOR A100 AND B100 ONLY) 1 EACH FLEXIBLE STOP 806051 619 1 EACH GASKET WHITE

2. HARDWARE SET NO. 2: PASSAGE SETS

3 EACH HINGES CP3535 894252 619 1 EACH PASSAGE F10 918051 619 1 EACH FLEXIBLE STOP 806051 619

3. HARDWARE SET NO. 3: GARAGE, PERSON DOORS

3 EACH HINGES CP3535 894252 619 1 EACH KEYED ENTRY LOCK F51 918056 619 1 EACH FLEXIBLE STOP 806051 619 1 EACH GASKET WHITE

4. HARDWARE SET NO. 4: POCKET DOORS

1 EACH POCKET DOOR SET 100721-DOOR SIZE 1 EACH PRIVACY LATCH 335 619

5. HARDWARE SET NO. 5: BIFOLD DOORS

1 EACH BIFOLD DOOR SET 100FD-DOOR SIZE X US15 HINGES 2 EACH PULLS 134.23.615 619

6. HARDWARE SET NO. 6: DOUBLE DOOR

3 EACH HINGES CP3535 894252 619 2 EACH ROLLER LATCHES RL32 619 2 EACH PULLS F170 ACC 619 1 EACH FLEXIBLE STOP 806051 619


7. HARDWARE SET NO. 7: PRIVACY SETS

3 EACH HINGES CP3535 894252 619 1 EACH PRIVACY F40 918053 619 1 EACH FLEXIBLE STOP 806051 619


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes.




1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.


2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL:

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD:


1. American Gypsum. 2. BPB America Inc. 3. CertainTeed Corp. 4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 and 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (party wall - Wall Type U1S). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS:

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES:

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.


2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."


2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES:

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture. c. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.

2. Texture: Spatter knock-down.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL:

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft.in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members, ,cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural

members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.


H. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD:

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS:

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES:

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners and where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.


3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD:

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Textured finish locations. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view and are specified with a flat paint, unless

otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES:

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.8 PROTECTION:

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 TILING 09 30 00 - 1

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes ceramic tile.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.


C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL:

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS:

A. Ceramic Tile:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b. Crossville, Inc.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS:

A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1 or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4:


a. Bostik, Inc. b. Laticrete International, Inc.


2.4 GROUT MATERIALS:

A. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.


a. Bostik, Inc. b. Laticrete International, Inc.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.6 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT:

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives, bonded mortar bed, or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.



3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION:

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

2. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint

Sealants."

G. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.


3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING:

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SHEET CARPETING 09 68 16 - 1

SECTION 09 68 16 - SHEET CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Carpet and accessories. 2. Carpet cushion.


A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate:

1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durability.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet.

2. Seam locations, types, and methods. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 5. Pile direction. 6. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 7. Transition details to other flooring materials. 8. Type of carpet cushion.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet: 12-inch-square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples. 3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch-square Sample. 4. Carpet Seam: 6-inchSample.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet and carpet cushion. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Comply with CRI 104.


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet and carpet cushion until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET: Refer to carpet selections on Drawings.

2.2 CARPET CUSHION: Refer to carpet cushion selections on Drawings.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES:

A. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.

B. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.

2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION:

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation instructions for the following:

1. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installations." 2. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet on Stairs" for installation.

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.


C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING:

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion manufacturer and carpet cushion and adhesive manufacturers.

3.5 SCHEDULE: Refer to Drawings for carpet locations.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 1

SECTION 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Wood. 2. Fiber-cement siding and trim.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.6 SEQUENCING:

A. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is applied.

B. Back prime wood trim before installation of trim.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Diamond Vogel Paints.


3. ICI Paints. 4. Kwal-Howells Paint. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Pratt & Lambert Paint (P&L). 7. Sherwin-Williams Company.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL:

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Wood: 15 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.


D. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler.

Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION:

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation,

paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE:

A. Wood:

1. One coat of P & L Exterior Oil Base Primer. 2. Two coats of P & L Aqua Royal House and Trim Finish.

B. Siding - Fiber –Cement Siding- Painted: Includes trim, fascia, and panels.

1. One coat Primaplus Primer by manufacturer. 2. Two Coats P & L Accolade Eggshell.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Wood. 2. Gypsum board.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:


B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit three (3) Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square, for each paint color and type. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.


B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Provide lighting level of 80 foot-candles, measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.7 SEQUENCING:

A. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is applied.

B. Back prime wood trim before installation of trim.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. Behr. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Diamond Vogel Paints. 4. Dupont. 5. The Glidden Company. 6. ICI Paints. 7. Kwal-Howells Paint. 8. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 9. Pratt & Lambert Paint (P&L) 10. Sherwin-Williams Company.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL:

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

C. Colors: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS:

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.

B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated.


2.4 WOOD PRIMERS:

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.


2.5 LATEX PAINTS:

A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).

1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.5.

B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).


2.6 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS:

A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).

1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.


C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

D. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler.

Sand smooth when dried.

E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION:

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items

to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1

SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes bath accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and

substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.

C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.5 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 SCHEDULE:

A. Master Bath: Moen "Retreat" product line (unless noted otherwise).

1. TA-2.1 - Paper Holder : #DN8308BN 2. TA-3.1 - Vanity Mirror. 3. TA-9.1 - Robe Hook: #DN8303BN 4. TA-10.1 - Towel Bar: 24 inches, #DN8324BN. 5. TA-12.1 - Towel Ring: #DN8386BN. 6. TA-13.1 - Medicine Cabinet.

B. Bathroom: Moen "Yorkshire" product line (unless noted otherwise).

1. TA-2.1 - Paper Holder: #BP5308SN. 2. TA-3.1 - Vanity Mirror. 3. TA-9.1 - Robe Hook: #BP5303SN. 4. TA-10.1 - Towel Bar: 24 inches, #BP5324SN. 5. TA-12.1 - Towel Ring: #BP5386SN. 6. TA-13.1 - Medicine Cabinet.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 10 30 50 - 1

SECTION 10 30 50 - MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes manufactured steel box fireplace, including doors, brick liner, screen panel kit, blower kit, and accessories and insulated chimney flue and associated roof flashings.

1.3 REFERENCES - UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.: UL 127 - Factory-Built Fireplaces.

1.4 UNIT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: Recessed wall mounted, concealed chimney flue, through ceiling type.

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - FUEL: Natural gas.

1.6 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions and rough opening sizes for chimney flue.

B. Product Data: Submit fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar construction, and applicable regulatory agency approvals.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and component installation sequence and clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES:

A. General: Only the brands of materials specified herein or added by addendum prior to bidding shall be bid and used in the construction of this project. Alternate brands may be approved prior to bidding and only if submitted in conformance with Section 01 Section – Product Requirements. All additional approved brands will be added to this section through written addendum.

B. Manufacturers: Design is based on Model No. EDV3530, Elite Series Front-View Direct-Vent Gas Fireplace as manufactured by Lennox Hearth Products.

C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Similar products as manufactured by the following manufacturers are also acceptable subject to compliance with this Specification.

1. Heatilator Fireside Furnishings. 2. Majestic Company. 3. Superior Fireplaces. 4. Heat-N-Glo Fireplace Products, Inc.

2.2 COMPONENTS:

A. Fire Box: Formed insulated steel cabinet, triangular corner shaped interior, configured to include chimney outlet and cleanout, and refractory brick lining.

1. Hearth Opening: 35-1/8 inches wide x 37-1/8 inches high x 27 7/16 inches deep. 2. Flue Diameter: 8 inches. 3. Combustion Air Source: Outside air with screened grilles and ducts. 4. BTU Rating: 27,000 (minimum).

B. Exposed Cladding: Steel.

C. Fire Box Closure: Clear tempered glass doors in metal frame, butt hinged, friction catch.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 10 30 50 - 2

D. Flue Construction: Insulated, air cooled with integral ducts, double wall steel sandwich construction, modular sized sections with elbows and spacing collars to permit site assembly, air and fire stop collars, elbows, elbow offsets, tees, supports, roofing storm collar, roof flashing.

E. Roof Terminations: Round terminal cap with collar.

2.3 ACCESSORIES:

A. Firestop Spacer: Non-combustible device designed to fit between chimney riser and penetrated floor or roof construction framing.

B. Roof Flashing: Prepainted sheet metal, configured to fit tightly to chimney riser and seal to shingle roofing system.

C. Trim: Standard

D. Liner: Buff Rustic

E. Gas Log Insert: Manufacturer’s standard.

F. Fire Box Grate: Wrought steel.

G. Barrier Screen kit: Affixed to front of fireplace.

H. Circulating Fans: Motor and fan, UL approved, 120 volt, with remote on/off variable speed control switch, sheet steel enclosure, and face grille.

I. Combustion Air Intake Duct: Galvanized steel incorporated into flue.

J. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Verify prepared openings are ready to receive Work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer.

B. Verify proper power supply and fuel source are available.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Install chimney plumb through prepared openings using fire stop spacers.

B. Secure chimney in opening framing with appropriate fasteners.

C. Carefully cut holes for fan wall switch and grilles.

D. Install roof flashings to ensure moisture is shed to exterior.

E. Startup and adjust to verify proper fuel gas operation and performance and chimney draft.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES:

A. Division 01 Section - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation of Chimney From Plumb: 1/2 inch.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 WIRE SHELVING 10 91 60 - 1

SECTION 10 91 60 – WIRE SHELVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Wire ventilated shelving and hanging rod for closets.

B. Wire ventilated shelving without hanging rod for linen closets.

C. Other areas as noted on the Drawings.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS – INSTALLED ASSEMBLY: Resist a uniform load of 50 lbs per lin. ft. without damage.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan dimensions, elevations, component details; and location of hardware.

C. Product Data: Provide data for shelving materials and finishes.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. General: Only the brands of materials specified herein or added by addendum prior to bidding shall be bid and used in the construction of this project. Alternate brands may be approved prior to bidding and only if submitted in conformance with Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.” All additional approved brands will be added to this section through written addendum.

B. Manufacturers: Design is based upon Superslide and Close Mesh products as manufactured by Closetmaid, Ocala, Florida.

C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Similar products as manufactured by Schulte Corporation, Cincinnati, Ohio, are also acceptable subject to compliance with this specification.

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Wire: Grade C-1008 basic cold drawn steel wire.

B. Tensile Strength: 100,000 psi (average).

C. Cross Deck Spacing: 1-inch increments.

D. Coating: Non-exuding formula PVC, "Shelflife," 9 to 11 mils thick.

E. Accessories: Components shall provide for shelving installation of drywall without requiring mounting to concealed wall structural members. Provide support brackets for all spans over three feet.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 WIRE SHELVING 10 91 60 - 2

2.3 HARDWARE: Provide all hardware necessary for a complete installation.

2.4 FABRICATION:

A. Closet shelves with hanging rod, 12" deep.

B. Fabricate linen closet shelves without rod, 16" deep.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION: Verify that substrate surfaces and required openings are ready to receive work.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

3.3 SCHEDULE:

A. Linen Closets: Five 16-inch deep Close Mesh shelves.

B. Coat Closets: One 12-inch deep Superslide shelf with hanging rod.

C. Laundry: One 16-inch deep Close Mesh shelf.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00 - 1

SECTION 11 31 00 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Cooking appliances. 2. Kitchen exhaust ventilation. 3. Refrigeration appliances. 4. Cleaning appliances.

B. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:

1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.6 WARRANTY:

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


B. Electric Cooktop and Range: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service on surface-burner elements.


C. Microwave Oven: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service.



D. Refrigerator/Freezer, Icemaker, Sealed System: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service on the product.

1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Other Components: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

E. Dishwasher: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service on the product.

1. Warranty Period for Deterioration of Tub and Metal Door Liner: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Other Components: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

F. Clothes Washer: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service on the product.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RANGES:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore). 2. Whirlpool Corporation.

B. Electric Range: Slide-in range with one oven and complying with AHAM ER-1.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model No. JSP42DNWW with JXS32SS backguard as manufactured by General Electric.

2.2 MICROWAVE OVENS:



B. Over-the-Range Microwave Oven :

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model No. JNM1541DMWW as manufactured by General Electric. 2. Exhaust Fan: Two -speed fan, nonvented, recirculating type with charcoal filter and with 300-cfm

capacity. Install Recirculating Charcoal Filter Kit - JX81J.

2.3 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS:



B. Refrigerator/Freezer: Two-door, side-by-side refrigerator/freezer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model No. GSCF3PGXWW as manufactured by General Electric. 2. Type: Freestanding with dispenser in door.


2.4 DISHWASHERS:



B. Dishwasher:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model No. GSD3300DWW as manufactured by General Electric. 2. Type: Built-in undercounter.

2.5 CLOTHES WASHERS AND DRYERS:



B. Clothes Washer:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model No. GTWN7450DWW as manufactured by General Electric. 2. Type: Freestanding, top -loading unit.

C. Clothes Dryer :

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model No. GTDP740EDWW as manufactured by General Electric. 2. Type: Freestanding, frontloading, electric unit.


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation.

C. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where overhead exhaust hoods and microwave ovens with vented exhaust fans will be installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

D. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Utilities: See Divisions 22 and 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

components.

C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 21 13 - 1

SECTION 12 21 13 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes horizontal louver blinds with polymer slats.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind.


A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, POLYMER SLATS:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hunter Douglas "Everwood" horizontal blinds or comparable product by the following:

1. Graber; Lake Forest.


B. Slats: Polymers that are lead free, UV stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, and will not crack or yellow; antistatic, dust-repellent treated.

1. Formulation: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch (minimum). 4. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard.

C. Lift Cord: Manufacturer's standard braided cord.

D. Valance: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss:

1. Slat Color: 746 Canvas Tote.

2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION:

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1/2 inch from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds.

2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails.


3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings.

3.3 ADJUSTING: Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges.


A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30 - 1

SECTION 12 35 30 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Kitchen cabinets. 2. Vanity and medicine cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed.

B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers, and bottoms of wall cabinets.

C. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets, and tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware.


A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of cabinets by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' cabinets of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. See Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.

C. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.

1.7 COORDINATION: Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINETS:

A. Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is based on Merillat Classic Series product line. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Aristokraft - Avalon, Maple species and Rouge finish. 2. Kitchen - Classic Series:

a. Door Style: Spring Valley Square. b. Wood Species: Maple. c. Finish: Sable.

3. Bathroom - Classic Series:

a. Door Style: Whitebay II Square (white vinyl laminate door and drawer fronts). b. Species: Laminate. c. : White. d. Medicine cabinet shall be Mandal Square from the Masterpiece Collection (white

laminate).

B. Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: 3/4-by-2-1/2-inch solid wood, interlocking with end panels and rabbeted to receive top and bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with glue and with mechanical fasteners.

C. Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch-thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails.

D. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame.

E. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.

F. Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation.

2.2 CABINET MATERIALS:

A. General:

1. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 2. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde.

B. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with Grade C faces and not less than Grade 3 backs of same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces or stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces.

C. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard.


2.3 CABINET HARDWARE:

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish.

B. Pulls:

1. Kitchen - #HP118 (Merillat). 2. Bathroom - #HP118 (Merillat).

C. Hinges: Semiconcealed (wraparound) butt hinges for overlay doors.

D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091.

2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS:

A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.

B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings, are aligned, and are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.

C. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.


A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61 - 1

SECTION 12 36 61 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Cultured marble couwntertops and backsplashes. 2. Solid-surface-material countertops.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 2. One full-size cultured marble countertop, with front edge and backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, of

construction and in configuration specified.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.5 COORDINATION: Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CULTURED MARBLE COUNTERTOPS (BATHROOMS):

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: No drip (raised marine edge with rolled front). 2. Backsplash: Coved, with 3/8-inch radius cove and top. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.

B. Countertops: 1/2-inch-thick, cultured marble.

C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick, cultured marble.

D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with integral sink bowls and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS (KITCHENS):

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Eased edge.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61 - 2

B. Countertops: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material.

D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS:

A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

C. Cultured Marble: Gel-coated solid fabrication of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI Z124.3, Type 4, with precoated finish, and not less than 1/2 inch thick.


a. Bathroom World Manufacturing Company. b. Cameo Marble. c. Cherry Marble Group. d. Comar Products, Inc. e. Craig Baker Marble Co., Inc. f. Cultured Marble Products. g. Imperial Marble Corp. h. Marbleon, Inc. i. MarCraft, Inc. j. Princess Marble. k. Roma Marble, Inc. l. Rynone Manufacturing Corp. m. Tiffany Marble.

2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.

1. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. 2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 EARTHWORK 31 20 00 - 1 Ehrhart Griffin & Associates

SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Site Preparation: Section 31 10 00.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work covered under this section shall consist of the fine grading of the site to conform to the grades, lines and contours shown on the Drawings. The Work shall include all excavation, shaping and sloping of all cut areas; all placing, compacting, shaping and finishing of all embankments in fill areas necessary for the completion of all site grading; including sub-grades, trench excavation and backfill for utility trenches.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D1557, Modified Proctor - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of soils and soil-aggregate mixture.

B. Incorporated by reference as part of these specifications is the Preliminary Geotechnical Exploration Report prepared by Thiele Geotech, dated April 30, 2010, Project No. 10142.00.


A. Soil testing shall be contracted and paid for by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling all tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all tests failing to meet specifications.

B. The Geotechnical Engineer referred to in these specifications shall be as identified in paragraph by the Owner at the pre-construction conference. In general, the services of the Geotechnical Engineer shall include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Perform classification tests and determine moisture-density relations for materials used for fill and backfill.

2. Test and approve subgrades under foundations, floor slabs and pavements. 3. Perform soil density tests, including observation and testing during compaction of fill and

preparation of subgrade to check suitability of soils, proper moisture content and degree of compaction.

The following minimum number of compaction and moisture tests, in accordance with appropriate ASTM procedures, shall be made, where determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, in the designated areas:

Designated Area Number of Tests All Lifts of Fill .................................................................... One test per 5,000 square feet or per smaller

separate area prepared. Completed Subgrade Below Slabs on Grade ................... One test per 5,000 square feet or per smaller

separate area prepared. Completed Subgrade for Drives and Parking Areas ......... One test per 5,000 square feet or large areas

or per 100 lineal feet of area less than 50 feet in width or per smaller separate area prepared.

Completed Subgrade for Walks ....................................... One test per every 100 lineal feet. Backfill for Foundations .................................................... One test horizontally every 100 feet and for

every one-foot of vertical lift.


Backfill for Utility Trenches:

Depth Over Top of Pipe Location of Test Frequency of Test

0-5 Feet Surface Every 100 Lineal Feet

5-12 Feet Surface and 1/2 Depth Every 100 Lineal Feet

Over 12 Feet Surface, 1/3 Depth, and 2/3 Depth Every 100 Lineal Feet

C. The Geotechnical Engineer or his field representative may request an increase in the moisture and compaction testing frequencies and/or locations based on observed changes in soils types, conditions or other factors present during earthwork operations.

D. In the case of a conflict between the construction documents and the soils report, the more stringent requirement, as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, shall apply.

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn the reform by Contractor. Data are made available for convenience of Contractor.

Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

B. The Contractor shall carefully maintain all bench marks, monuments, stakes, and other reference points and replace same if disturbed or destroyed at no cost to the Owner.

C. Contractor shall exercise extreme care to protect all existing underground and overhead utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing all utilities damaged or destroyed during construction.

D. Contractor shall protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features, which are to remain after construction is completed.

E. Properly dispose of all waste materials. On-site burial will not be allowed.

F. Protect all excavations from the action of the elements. Keep all excavations free of water or snow at all times during the entire progress of construction, regardless of the cause, source or nature of the water. Temporarily grade areas adjacent to excavations to prevent excessive moisture from entering excavations. If water enters excavations, or other construction areas, dewater promptly using means which will ensure dry excavations and the preservation of all lines and grades. Provide ample means and devices at all times during construction to ensure prompt and adequate removal of water. Where soil has been softened or eroded by actions of the elements remove all damaged areas, replace soil and re-compact as required by these specifications.

G. Provide for surface drainage during construction of the project so at all times there is positive drainage.

H. Provide erosion control as shown on the drawings and described in the general notes or as required by the Engineer to prevent damage to areas within the construction limits and to adjacent properties.

I. The contractor shall guard against any movement, settlement, or collapse of all excavations, buildings, structures, paved areas, drives, sidewalks, streets, utility items or any other item adjacent to or within the construction limits of this project.

J. The contractor shall repair, at his expense, all damage occurring to the owner’s property or any other property (on or off the premises) that resulted from lack of adequate protection. The Architect shall approve all repair or replacement.


1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Suitable materials include material that is low plasticity cohesive soil, free of debris, roots, organic matter, frozen matter, and which is free of stones or foreign material with any dimension greater than 2 inches.

B. Unsuitable materials include all material that contains debris, roots, organic matter, frozen matter, stone (with any dimension greater than 1 1/2 inches, or other materials that are determined by the Engineer or Soil Engineer as too wet or otherwise unsuitable for providing a stable subgrade.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL (EMBANKMENT) AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. All fill and backfill materials unless otherwise noted shall be approved low plasticity cohesive soils, free of rubble and organics (less than approximately 5% by weight), with a liquid limit less than 45 and a plasticity index less than 20. When unsuitable materials are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in accordance with the General Conditions. If directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate and replace with suitable material.

B. The on-site excavations are expected to be suitable for reuse as structural fill following moisture conditioning.

C. Conditioning agents – fly ash, lime or Portland cement – shall be permitted only with the approval and under the direction of the geotechnical engineer.

D. Topsoil shall be rich, fine and well drained material, which has previously been stripped and stored on the site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be adequate for the purpose for which it is to be used and shall be kept in satisfactory working order. Equipment shall be adequate to perform all excavation, hauling, placing of embankment, compaction, trimming, and shaping.

3.2 OVER-EXCAVATION – Not Used

3.3 SURCHARGE – Not Used

3.4 FILL AND COMPACTION

A. Strip topsoil and vegetation to a minimum depth of approximately 4 to 6 inches, or below the root crown. All vegetation should be removed within and at least 5 feet beyond the limits of the proposed buildings, pavements, and drive-through areas. Stripping activity will not be permitted on wet ground unless first approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

The Contractor shall consult the Geotechnical Engineer during stripping operations to avoid removing more topsoil than is necessary. Prior to placement of any fill, floor slabs or pavement construction, stripped subgrades shall be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer to verify all unsuitable materials have been removed.

B. Following the stripping operation, all cuts to rough subgrade beneath future pavements shall be proof rolled, in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer, with a fully loaded, tandem axle dump truck with a minimum gross weight of 25 tons. All unsuitable areas shall be removed and backfilled with structural fill at the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer.


C. All fill shall be placed as structural fill. Prior to the placement of any new fill, the subbase of any area receiving less than 12 inches of structural fill shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 12 inches; moisture conditioned and compacted according to the specifications. All new fill shall be placed in 8-inch maximum lifts and compacted as specified hereinafter using a sheepsfoot type roller. Bench all slopes steeper than 5H:IV in benches no greater than 4 feet. All scarified soils that cannot meet the specified compaction requirements shall be removed and the area backfilled and compacted with suitable material, as defined by this specification.

D. Compaction of Fill - All fill and backfill shall be wetted or dried by aeration, and then compacted as structural fill to the following percentage of maximum density at a moisture content within the limits specified above or below optimum moisture content, as determined by Testing Procedures ASTM D698, Standard Proctor or ASTM D1557, Modified Proctor, unless otherwise noted:

Material Percent of Maximum (Cohesive Soil Only) ASTM Percent Above

All Lifts of Structural Fill .......................................... 95% Minimum D698 -3% to +4%

Trench Backfill (Less than 6’-0” Wide Below 5’-0” Depth) ............................................................. 92% Minimum D698

-3% to +6%

Trench Backfill (Less than 6’-0” Wide Upper 5’-0” Depth) ............................................................. 95% Minimum D698

-3% to +4%

Trench Backfill (More than 5’-0” Outside of Pavement ................................................................ 90% Minimum D698

Sufficient to Provide Compaction

Interior Backfill (Trenches and Foundations) .......... 95% Minimum D698 -3% to +4%

Upper 6” of Floor Slab Subgrade ............................ 95% Minimum D698 -3% to +4%

Retaining Wall Backfill ............................................ 95% Minimum D698 -3% to +4%

Upper 12” of Concrete Pavement Subgrade ........... 90% Minimum D1557 -3% to +4%

Curb Backfill ............................................................ 95% Minimum D698 -3% to +4%

E. Compact cohesive soils by the use of sheepsfoot or pneumatic type compactors under optimum moisture conditions. Compact granular soils with vibratory compaction equipment.

F. Concrete pavement subgrade preparation shall extend a minimum of 2’ laterally beyond the outer limits of the pavement. Sidewalk subgrade shall extend a minimum of 6” beyond the outer edge of the sidewalk.

G. The Contractor shall not commence construction activity without the approval of the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.5 EXCAVATION

A. Perform excavation to dimensions and elevations indicated on Drawings. Care shall be taken during excavation and site work to avoid unnecessarily disturbing soils at the greater depth excavations.

B. Existing fills and native soils determined suitable for reuse as structural fill or backfill may require moisture conditioning upon excavation.

C. All excavated material not suitable for filling or backfilling as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and all excess earth or other material shall be removed from the site.


D. Unexpected Subsurface Condition. Where suitable bearings are encountered at different elevations from those indicated on the drawings, the Architect shall direct, in writing, that the excavation be carried to elevations above or below those indicated on the Drawings. Adjustment in payment shall be made in accord with the terms of the General Conditions.

E. During construction of roadways and parking areas, the roadbed shall be maintained in such condition that it will be adequately drained at all times. Side ditches emptying from cuts to embankments shall be constructed so as to avoid damage to embankments by erosion. The finished roadway shall be free from waves and true to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the Drawings.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES

A. Excavate as required for manholes and other appurtenances until firm, undisturbed soil is reached. If excavation is carried below bottom of foundations as shown on the Drawings, fill with 3,000 psi concrete or stabilizing material, as directed by the Architect, at no expense to Owner.

B. When unstable material is encountered which will not provide suitable bearing (as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer), fill with 3,000 psi concrete or stabilizing material specified herein, or as directed by Architect. Contractor shall be entitled to payment for this extra work in accordance with the General Conditions.

3.7 TRENCHING

A. Perform trenching operations to the depth indicated on the Drawings or as specified.

B. Pile excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner sufficient distance back from edge of excavation to avoid rollbacks, slides, or cave-ins.

C. Remove soil not suitable for backfill and waste at a disposal area designated by the Geotechnical Engineer.

D. Where new construction crosses or closely parallels existing utilities or utility services, excavate in advance of pipe laying to determine location and crossing arrangement, including exact construction line and grade.

E. Excavate by open cut under existing streets, utilities, and structures, except as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

F. Keep width of trench as narrow as possible, but provide adequate room for backfilling and jointing. Keep sides of the trench as nearly vertical as practical within the limits of excavation codes and maintain vertical walls of excavation below top of pipe. Trench widths shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Trench Width 3/4" to 3" 12" 4" to 8" 24" 10" to 16" 36" 18" to 24" 48" 30" and Greater Pipe Size Plus 18" Each Side

G. Excavate to full depth by machine and level trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for full length of pipe. Trench bottom shall be continuous, relatively smooth, and free of rocks.

H. Bed trench bottom as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

I. Provide bell holes at each pipe joint and allow access around entire circumference of pipe for proper jointing operations.


J. Install pipe and provide a minimum pipe envelope, consisting of compacted backfill completely around the pipe, and a distance of 12 inches above the top of the pipe.

K. When unstable material is encountered which may not provide a suitable foundation for pipe, notify the Engineer immediately. If determined by the Engineer upon his/her investigation that the material is unsuitable for foundations, the Engineer may specify and authorize remedial measures. If removal of unsuitable material is authorized, replace it with a stabilizing material consisting of three-fourths inch to one and one-half inch (3/4" to 1 1/2") size, coarse, sharp, clean, well-graded crushed stone or other approved material. Provide a minimum of four inches (4") of bedding material on top of the stabilizing material to prevent point load.

L. Excavate by hand under and around utilities, where overhead clearance prevents use of machine, and under trees and shrubs where shown on the Drawings.

M. Construct sheeting, shoring, and bracing required to hold walls of excavation, to provide safety for workmen, to protect existing utilities or structures, and to permit dry construction. If wood sheeting is driven below the level of pipe, it shall be left in place to a level 5 feet below finished grade. Steel sheeting shall be pulled upon completion unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. When a movable trench shield is used below the spring line of the pipe, it shall be lifted prior to any forward movement to avoid pipe displacement.

N. If dewatering is necessary, obtain the Architect's approval of proposed methods of dewatering. When dewatering is necessary, provide for handling of water encountered during construction. Lay no pipe in and pour no concrete on excessively wet soil. Prevent surface water from flowing into the excavations and remove water as it accumulates. Divert stream flow away from areas of construction.

Do not pump water onto adjacent property without approval of Architect and adjacent property owner. Do not use sanitary sewers for disposal of trench water. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the original Bid Price for construction. No additional remuneration for dewatering shall be permitted.

3.8 BACKFILLING

A. Place the backfill for structures in horizontal uniform layers not to exceed 9 inches loose thickness. Bring each layer up uniformly on all sides of the structure and thoroughly compact using pneumatic compaction or other methods as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Granular backfill shall not be used in exterior areas.

B. Employ a placement method that will not disturb or damage foundation waterproofing.

C. When embankments are constructed on side hill slopes steeper than 5H:1V, the area of the original slope on which embankment is to be placed shall be stepped to a vertical depth of at least twelve inches (12") in order in integrate the embankment and the slope.

D. Place all embankments to the grades, lines, and contours shown on the Drawings. Place embankment systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for natural settlement. The hauling of embankment material shall be distributed over the entire embankment areas to assist in compacting the material.

E. Do not place embankments over porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces. If necessary, remove such unsuitable material and replace with satisfactory stabilizing materials, as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankment and excavation areas and shall replace, at Contractor's own expense, any portions, which become displaced or unstable prior to the expiration of the warranty period.

G. Remove excess backfill material from site.


3.9 BACKFILL FOR TRENCHES

A. Back fill trenches immediately after the location of all lines, connections, and appurtenances are recorded, or at the Architect's direction.

B. Construct manholes and appurtenances and perform backfilling as work progresses.

C. Backfill with material removed from excavation except where sand backfill may be specified. Backfill material shall be as specified herein and shall not contain any debris, frozen earth, large clods, stones, or other unsuitable material.

D. Place backfill simultaneously on both sides of the pipe to prevent displacement. Place backfill into the trench at an angle so that the impact on the installed pipe is minimized. Install a cushion of four feet (4') of backfill above the pipe envelope before using heavy compaction equipment.

E. Hand place backfill in the pipe envelope and compact finely divided material to twelve inches (12") over the top of the pipe.

F. Backfill remainder of trench with excavated material up to the bottom of the specified surface restoration.

G. Backfill top twelve inches (12") of the trench with soil equivalent to adjacent topsoil.

H. Do not use granular backfill in exterior trenches.

3.10 BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES

A. Backfill with material removed from excavation. Backfill material shall be as specified herein and shall not contain any debris, frozen earth, large clods, stones, or other unsuitable material. Backfill simultaneously on all sides of the structure to prevent damage at all times. Brace walls of structures as required.

B. Compact backfill at structures to a density not less than specified for the adjacent trench.

C. Terminate backfill at finish grade as shown on the Drawings and dispose of excess excavation material as directed by the Architect. Prepare backfill for surface restoration as specified for adjacent trench.

3.11 TOPSOIL AND FINISH GRADING

A. See Landscape plans for imported topsoil requirements.

B. Upon completion of rough grading, the Contractor shall spread topsoil over all areas graded under this Contract and not receiving other surfacing or in the building area. Before spreading topsoil, graded areas shall be scarified for a depth of 3 inches, and all settlements and washes shall be repaired. Finish grade shall be held 1 inch below adjacent sidewalks, curbs and pavement. Topsoil shall be free of rocks, rubble, wood and other undesirable material.

C. Perform finish grading of topsoil adequately for sod, seed or whatever material is placed in each area. Finished surface shall be reasonably smooth, compacted and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from blade grader operations, except as otherwise needed. Finished surface shall be not more than 0.10 feet above or below established grade or approved cross section. All swales shall be finished so as to drain readily.

D. Lightly compact placed topsoil. Settle topsoil with a fine spray of water to avoid separation of ingredients. Do not jet or flood topsoil.


E. Hand rake as necessary around trees, plants, buildings, and structures. Maintain sufficient topsoil reserve to regrade as necessary after initial settlement. Upon regrading, remove surplus topsoil and subsoil from the site.

F. Final topsoil thickness shall be as follows: Location Thickness (Inches) Seeded Grass Areas 6 Minimum Sod Areas 4 Minimum Tree and Shrub Beds 12 Minimum Ground Cover Areas 12 Minimum

3.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.

B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction.

C. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NE 2011.192.01 SITE PREPARATION 31 22 00 - 1 Ehrhart Griffin & Associates

SECTION 31 22 00 - SITE PREPARATION GENERAL SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Keep project site free from drainage ponding due to construction operations during progress of Work. Make arrangements for disposal of all water and sewage received on the site from temporary connections or stoppages. Do not discharge any water or sewage onto private property outside the construction right-of-way.

B. Strip topsoil and separately store to provide depth of topsoil replacement as specified. C. Remove and store obstructions such as culvert pipe, signs, and fences for replacement upon completion of

construction. Provide temporary fencing if necessary to prevent accidents until permanent fencing is restored.

1.2 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Contractor is responsible for liaison with utility companies and for repairing utilities and services, which are not in direct conflict with the Work, and is responsible for damage during construction at no expense to the Owner, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Utilities shown on drawings, in direct line and grade, which conflict with (the new piping systems) the Work, shall

be relocated by others at no expense to the Contractor, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. C. For utilities not shown on the Drawings and which are in direct conflict with the Work, the Contractor shall notify

the Engineer of the conflict. When directed, the Contractor shall perform the Work. The Contractor shall be entitled to payment for any extra work in accordance with the General Conditions.

D. Utility removal. Before the Contractor begins Work, he shall confer with the owners of any underground or

overhead utilities, which may be on or in close proximity to the Work areas and shall arrange for the necessary disconnection of the utilities in accordance with the utility company regulations. The utility company or owner of the utility shall perform the work of removing, repairing, reconditioning, or revising the utility unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall cooperate with the utility companies so that Work can be expedited to the best interests of all concerned.

1.3 TREE REMOVAL

A. Tree removal shall consist of only those shown on the Drawings or as authorized by the Owner and the Engineer. Do not remove any tree not designated for removal.

B. Fell, cut and remove trees together with down timber, stumps, roots, and brush. Backfill and dispose of debris.

1.4 PAVEMENT REMOVAL

A. Remove pavement to a minimum of 1' - 0" from edge of trench. No undercutting will be permitted. Remove pavement on straight lines approximately parallel to the center line of the trench. Cut pavement and drives with a concrete saw and provide a minimum vertical cut of 1 inch.

B. Remove sidewalk pavement to the nearest joint beyond a minimum distance of 1' - 0" from edge of trench.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NE 2011.192.01 SITE PREPARATION 31 22 00 - 2 Ehrhart Griffin & Associates

1.5 ACCESS TO STREETS

A. Contractor shall maintain a suitable means of access for all traffic using streets involved in construction, except as specifically permitted otherwise by the Owner. Notify Owner twenty-four (24) hours in advance of any street closure.

B. Whenever construction is stopped due to inclement weather, on weekends and holidays, or for other reasons,

suitable access shall be provided for all property owners. 1.6 DISRUPTION OF UTILITY SERVICE

A. Contractor shall maintain utility service to all property owners or customers of utilities throughout the construction period unless repairs or improvements are authorized. In the event of repairs, replacements or improvements to utility service lines, the Contractor shall give the property owner or customer 24-hour notice of the upcoming disruption. Disruption of service shall be for as brief a period as possible so as not to cause undue inconvenience to the affected property owner or customer.

1.7 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

A. Remove structures regardless of materials of which they are constructed. Removal shall include, but not be limited to, sidewalks, steel, cast iron, concrete, rubbish, junk, wood, and miscellaneous items.

1.8 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS AND REFUSE

A. Contractor shall dispose of surface materials, construction debris and trees in accordance with all Federal, State and Local laws and regulations. Burning of refuse will not be permitted.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16 - 1

SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY: Section includes soil treatment with termiticide.


A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product.

1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.



B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer.

C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following:

1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.


A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located, and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT:

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.


a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. c. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Dragnet FT Talstar Prevail. d. Syngenta; Demon TC Prelude Probuild TC.

2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.

1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL:

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.


3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT:

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.

3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

D. Post warning signs in areas of application.

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 32 32 23 - 1 RDG IA: 2011.505.02

SECTION 32 32 23 – SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes single-depth segmental retaining walls with aggregate backfill, drainage, and soil reinforcement.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving".

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide segmental retaining walls capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades indicated, and determined according to NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls."

B. Drainage: Provide segmental retaining wall drainage system capable of preventing accumulation of groundwater in retained soils and in retaining wall foundation soils.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Samples: Furnish one unit in the color and face pattern specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Retaining wall system design, including wall elevation views, geosynthetic reinforcement layout, pertinent details, and drainage provisions. The shop drawings shall be signed by a registered professional engineer licensed in the state of wall installation.


A. Prior to the start of work, the contractor shall submit documentation that the retaining wall system has been successfully utilized on a minimum of five (5) similar projects, i.e. height, soil fill types, erection tolerances, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products:

1. Anchor Diamond Retaining Wall Systems;

a. Style: Anchor Artisana Wall Units. b. Color: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full range.


c. Face Pattern: Sculpted, non-split, formed face. d. Block Size: 3- and 6-inch-high units. e. Wall Setback (Batter): 1-1/8” setback per course.

2. Approved equal.

2.2 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS

A. Shall comply with;

1. ASTM C 90 – Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 2. ASTM C 140 – Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.

B. Wall units shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi in accordance with ASTM C 90.

C. The concrete shall have adequate freeze/thaw protection with maximum moisture absorption of eight percent.

D. Exterior dimensions shall vary in accordance with ASTM C 90.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Pins and Clips: Product supplied by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units provided, made from nondegrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers.

B. Cap Adhesive: Product supplied or recommended by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer.

C. Leveling Base: Material shall be a compacted crushed stone or non-reinforced concrete pad.

D. Drainage Fill: Shall consist of clean 1” minus crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the following gradation tested in accordance with ASTM D 422:

Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 3/4” 75 - 100 # 4 0 – 10 # 200 0 - 5

E. Soil Backfill: Shall be free of debris and meet the following gradation tested in accordance with ASTM D 422: Sieve Size Percent Passing 2 inch 100 3/4 inch 75 – 100 # 4 0 – 60 # 200 0 - 35

F. Drainage Pipe: Shall be perforated or slotted PVC pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3034 or corrugated HDPE pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 1248.

G. Soil Reinforcement: Product specifically manufactured for use as soil reinforcement and as follows:

1. Shall be a regular grid structure of high density polyethylene (HPDE) or polyester. 2. Shall be a horizontal layer of high strength high modulus grid capable of creating a composite

soil/geogrid mass that acts as a monolithic gravity structure in conformance to Iowa DOT 4196.01E.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. The contractor shall excavate to the lines and levels as indicated on the drawings. Proof roll foundation area to determine if remedial work is required. Over-excavation and replacement of unsuitable soils will be paid for as an addition to the contract.

3.2 LEVELING BASE

A. Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than 95 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 or 90 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

3.3 WALL INSTALLATION

A. Place first course of segmental retaining wall units on leveling base/course for full length of wall. Place units in firm contact with each other, properly aligned and level.

1. Install first course per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Tamp units into leveling base as necessary to bring tops of units into a level plane. 3. Place and compact fill, either drainage or soil fill as indicated, to top of first course. Place fill on

both sides of wall at same time without disturbing alignment of units. Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill.

4. Use only 6-inch x 16-inch and 6—inch x 8-inch units for the first course. Maintain the same elevation at the top of each unit within each section of the base course.

B. For subsequent Courses, remove excess fill and debris from tops of units in course below. Place units in firm contact, properly aligned, and directly on course below.

1. Place fill on both sides of wall at same time, where both sides are indicated to be filled. 2. Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill.

C. Place cap units and secure with cap adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 BACKFILL PLACEMENT

A. Comply with requirements in NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide," and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Place, spread, and compact fill in uniform lifts for full width and length of embankment as wall is laid. Begin at back of wall and place and spread fill toward embankment.

1. Use only hand-operated compaction equipment within 48 inches of wall, or one-half of height above bottom of wall, whichever is greater.

2. Compact drainage fill to not less than 95 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 or 90 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

3. Compact reinforced soil fill to not less than 95 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 or 90 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

C. Place a layer of drainage fill at least 12 inches deep behind wall to within 12 inches of finished grade. Place a layer of filter fabric between drainage fill and soil fill.

1. Wrap drainage pipe with filter fabric and place in drainage fill sloped 1:50 to drain. 2. Place impervious fill over top edge of drainage fill layer.


D. Place soil reinforcement in horizontal joints of retaining wall according to soil reinforcement manufacturer's written instructions. Embed reinforcement a minimum of 8 inches into retaining wall and stretch tight over compacted backfill. Anchor soil reinforcement before placing fill on it.

1. Place additional soil reinforcement at corners and curved walls to provide continuous reinforcement and to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Place geosynthetics with seams, if any, oriented perpendicular to segmental retaining walls. 3. Do not dump fill material directly from trucks onto geosynthetics. 4. Place at least 6 inches of fill over reinforcement before compacting with tracked vehicles or 4

inches before compacting with rubber-tired vehicles. 5. Do not turn vehicles on fill until first layer of fill is compacted and second layer is placed over each

soil-reinforcement layer.

3.5 SITE CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Site Construction Tolerances

1. Vertical Alignment: Plus or minus 1-1/2 inches over any 10-foot distance, with a maximum differential of 3 inches over the length of the wall.

2. Horizontal Location Control from Grading Plan

a. Straight Lines: Plus or minus 1-1/2 inches over any 10-foot distance. b. Corner and Radius Locations: Plus or minus 12 inches. c. Curves and Serpentine Radii: Plus or minus 2 feet.

3. Immediate Post Construction Wall Batter: Within 2 degrees of the design batter of the concrete retaining wall units.

4. Bulging: Plus or minus 1-1/2 inches over any 10-foot distance.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 for in-place compaction testing.

1. In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least 1 field in-place compaction test for each 150 feet or less of segmental retaining wall length.

END SECTION 32 32 23

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 00 - 1 RDG IA: 2011.505.02

SECTION 32 84 00 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and General Provisions on Contract, including Bidding Requirements, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to work in this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK:

A. The following design build irrigation system when fully completed shall water all noted landscaped areas. Providing the ability for a minimum of 1.25”/week turf with all zones watering in an 8 hour maximum water window. It is the intent of the performance specification to install all products within the Owner’s property limits and within newly sodded areas. Limits of irrigation shall be defined within the turf areas of the site and all mechanical equipment shall be located in the mechanical room – See Division 22 specifications.

B. Provide all design, labor, materials, equipment, and supervision required to construct the irrigation system including:

1. Valves, mechanical and electrical; 2. Controllers and wiring; 3. Piping; 4. Automatic irrigation sprinklers and quick coupling valves.

C. Irrigation system shall be installed as a complete coordinated system. All equipment whether mentioned or not shall be provided for the proper operation of irrigation system. Operation shall be as per manufacturer recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Owner.

D. Design, engineer, provide and install within the building mechanical room, as required, the following:

1. City water service, booster pump and starter, valves, unions, fittings and piping. 2. Irrigation meter (as per City Codes). 3. Reduced pressure backflow prevention device – as per code located over drain. 4. All work requiring a licensed plumber shall be a part of the General Contractor work. Irrigation

Contractor to coordinate, see 3.7B this specification section.

E. Stub-out from irrigation to lawn area @ 18” below both finish exterior grades and install a connection at turf end. Size as required. Coordinate with General Contractor.

F. Provide and install piping and wire sleeves under walks and drives. Both piping and 24 VAC wiring sleeves shall be schedule 40 PVC. Size, depth, and location as required, 2 sizes larger than piping carried. Coordinate with General Contractor.

G. Engineered shop drawings with all product submittals shall be provided to Landscape Architect for approval not less than 4 weeks before installation.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Division 22 – Plumbing.

B. Division 26 – Electrical.

C. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate with the Sodding and Landscape Contractors to ensure adequate and timely irrigation of all sod and plant materials and to establish the correct location of irrigation components relative to sod and plant material beds.


1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE:

A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for shipment and protection of materials.

B. Handling of materials as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Storage of all materials in locations designated and approved by General Contractor.

1.5 CODES, INSPECTIONS, AND PERMITS:

A. The entire installation shall fully comply with all local and state laws and ordinances, and with all the established codes applicable thereto.

B. The Contractor shall take out all required permits, arrange for all necessary inspections and shall pay any fees and expenses in conjunction with the same as a part of the work under this section.

C. If required, the Owner will provide the City and utility companies with a “Hold-Harmless” agreement for sprinklers on public lands and easements.

1.6 SITE DISTURBANCES:

A. Take precautions to ensure that equipment and vehicles do not disturb or damage existing site grading, walks, curbs, pavements, utilities, plants, and other existing items and elements on public and private property.

B. Verify locations and depths of all underground utilities prior to commencing excavation.

C. Repair and/or return to original condition any damage caused by Contractor’s negligence at no cost to the Owner.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Existing Utilities:

1. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during this work.

2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in full operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by Owner and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

4. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to Owner and Landscape Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.

5. Demolish and complete remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed after complete deactivation. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active.

B. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post warning lights. 2. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, curbs, and other facilities from damage caused

by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by this work.


1.8 GUARANTEE:

A. For a period of one (1) years from date of final acceptance of work performed under this Section, the Contractor shall promptly furnish and install any and all parts and equipment which prove defective in materials, workmanship, or installation at no additional cost to Owner.

B. During the one (1) year guarantee period, the Contractor shall drain the irrigation system and winterize each fall for the winter and shall put the irrigation system back into operation each spring at no additional cost to Owner. Notify Owner and arrange for a common time for attendance by Owner personnel before start-up or shut-down operations.

1.9 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit with shop drawings three (3) copies of all manufacturer’s technical data and specifications for all component parts of the underground sprinkler system.

B. Submit to Landscape Architect three (3) copies of design and installation drawings (shop drawings) for underground irrigation system including plan layout hydraulic and electrical calculations with details illustrating location and type of heads, valves, piping circuits, controls and accessories per paragraph 1.2G of this Section.

C. Describe in detail, with the submittal of the above items, any proposed deviation or variance from the equipment or installation described herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. All sprinklers, electric valves and controllers shall be Hunter or equal product line manufacturer as approved during shop drawing review or prior request. Said equipment and products are listed in the specifications below.

B. All sprinkler equipment must be purchased by the local authorized serviced regional distributor.

2.2 COPPER PIPING:

A. Hard Copper. -As per local codes (by mechanical contractor)

2.3 P.V.C.:

A. Sizes 1” diameter and larger.

B. Virgin, high impact, poly-vinyl chloride (P.V.C.) pipe, Schedule 1120-1220. Mainline piping: class 200, having a minimum of 200 psi working pressure rating. Lateral piping: class 200, having a minimum of 200 psi working pressure rating.

C. Continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer’s name, material, size, and schedule or type.

D. Pipe: Conform to CS 207-60 or latest revision.

E. Material: Conform to CS 256-63 or latest revision.

2.4 P.V.C. PIPE FITTINGS:

A. Sch. 40 P.V.C. solvent weld or belled fittings; saddles prohibited.

B. Conform to ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466 or latest revision.


2.5 POLYETHYLENE PIPE:

A. Flexible polyethylene pipe rated at 100-psi minimum working pressure.

B. 1” through 1 1/2” diameter.

C. Product Standard PS11-69 or ASTM D2239-73 for PE 2306, SDR-15 or latest revision.

2.6 POLYETHYLENE FITTINGS:

A. Schedule 100 P.V.C.

B. All fittings larger than1” shall be secured with double stainless steel clamps.

2.7 SADDLE TEES:

A. Blazing Saddle self-tapping fitting as manufactured by Blazing Products Inc., St. Louis, MO, or pre-approved equal.

2.8 SPRINKLER RISER OFF POLYETHLENE PIPE:

A. Cut-off polyethylene risers mounted on saddle tees.

B. Riser height as required.

2.9 ELECTRICAL CONTROL VALVES:

A. Manufacturer’s standard, of type as follows:-see plan

1. Globe valves operated by low-power solenoid, normally closed, manual flow adjustment.

2.10 CONTROL CABLE:

A. All electrical control and ground wire shall be “UF/PE” direct burial.

B. 12 ga. “UF/PE” white common neutral 14 ga. “PE” red control wire.

C. A separate common neutral wire is required from controller along entire main line and dropped in marked valve box.

D. Provide one spare control wire from controller along entire main line.

E. No aluminum wire allowed.

F. Wiring used for connecting automatic remote control valve to automatic controllers shall be type “UF/PE”, 600 volt, solid copper, single conductor wire with direct burial insulation and bear “UL” approval for direct underground burial feeder cable.

G. Direct Bury Splice Kit: 3M DBY.

2.11 SPRINKLER HEADS - PER SUBMITTED SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Sprinkler heads: Manufacturer’s standard unit designed to provide uniform coverage over entire designated area at available or boosted water pressure. Types as follows:

1. Bubbler: Fixed pattern, with screw-type adjustment. Not required. 2. Shrubbery: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. Not required.


3. Pop-Up Spray: Fixed patter, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless steel retraction spring. 4. Pop-Up Rotary Spray: Gear drive, full circle and fixed or adjustable part circle type.

B. Spacing of heads shall not exceed manufacturer’s maximum recommendations. Head-to-head coverage is required.

C. Matched precipitation will be required on all sprinklers operating on the same zone.

D. Conform to manufacturer’s specifications concerning diameter of throw and gallonage at given pressures.

2.12 CONTROL EQUIPMENT – PER SUBMITTED SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Furnish low voltage system manufacturered expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of underground irrigation systems. Provide unit(s) of capacity to suit number of circuits.

B. Exterior Control Enclosure: Manufacturer’s standard with locking cover, complying with NFPA 70.

C. Transformer: To convert building service voltage to control voltage of 24 volts.

D. Circuit Control: Each circuit variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each circuit.

E. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour and 7 or 14 day clocks to operate any time of day and skip any day in a 7 or 14 day period.

F. Settings: solid state.

G. Coordinate location of controller(s) with Owner.

H. No time lag between sections or stations.

2.13 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW DEVICE – PER SUBMITTED SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Manufacturer’s standard, to suit sprinkler system

2.14 IRRIGATION METER – PER SUBMITTED SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. As required by Owner or entity providing water service. Installed by Contractor.

2.15 QUICK COUPLING VALVES:

A. Located in intervals along all mainline pipe adjacent to plant beds. Verify final locations with Owner. One per plant bed.

B. Install quick coupling valve in Ametek’s standard circular valve box.

C. Provide matching quick coupler keys. One key for each 3 coupling valves.

2.16 ISOLATION VALVES:

A. See plan for actual location and verify final locations with the Owner.

B. Size valve to match line size.

C. Install isolation valves in 12” standard valve box according to the plans.


2.17 VALVE BOX FOR ELECTRICAL CONTROL VALVES, QUICK COUPLING VALVES, AND ISOLATION VALVES:

A. Single Valve Setup: Ametek 12” standard box.

B. Multi-Valve Setup: Ametek’s jumbo box. Use manufacturer’s recommended extension kits if required.

C. Quick Coupling Valves: Ametek’s 10” circular box.

2.18 SLEEVES:

A. Coordinate with General Contractor.

2.19 THRUST BLOCK:

A. Pour concrete thrust blocks at all change of directions to ensure against pipe separation.

B. Provide standard details as a part of the shop drawing submittal.

2.20 PUMP AND PUMP STARTER – PROVIDE IF STATIC PRESSURE FALLS BELOW 85 PSI (STATIC):

A. Coordinate size, location, and installation with General Contractor.

B. Verify voltage with Electrical Contractor.

2.21 SWING JOINTS:

A. LASCO 360 deg. Swing Joint Assembly as manufactured by Philips Industries or approved substitute.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM DESIGN:

A. Design Pressure: Verify static water pressure with Owner, or entity supply water service. Provide booster pump and 24 VAC starter if static pressures are below 85 psi static. Do not include or connect to the fire suppression side of any water lines.

B. Location of Heads: Locate heads as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Make minor adjustments as necessary to avoid plantings and other obstructions and to provide proper location relative to finished lawns and plant beds. Exact locations of piping, sprinkler heads, valves, and other components shall be established by the Contractor in the field at time of installation and on the approved shop drawings.

C. Minimum Water Coverage: Design to deliver the equivalent of 1.25” of rainfall per week. System total operating time not to exceed 8 hours per 24-hour day.

D. Minor adjustments to system field layout will be permitted to clear existing fixed obstructions; final field layout shall be acceptable to the Owner based on the approved shop drawings.

3.2 TIMING:

A. Coordinate watering time schedule with Landscape, Sodding, and Seeding Contractors.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Excavating and Backfilling:

1. Excavation shall include all materials encountered, except materials that cannot be excavated by normal mechanical means.

2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and installation of pipe and fittings.


3. If the pulling method is used, the pipe “plow” shall be a vibratory type. Starting and finishing holes for pipe pulling shall not exceed a 1’-0” by 3’-0” opening.

4. Excavate to depths required to provide 2” depth of earth fill or sand bedding for piping when rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered.

5. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place and compact fill in layers not greater than 8” depth.

a. Provide approved earth fill or sand to a point 4” above the top of pipe. b. Overfill with approved excavated or borrow fill materials free of lumps or rocks larger than

3” in any dimension. Level, compact and water settle. Should settlement occur, refill and re-sod as required.

6. Except as indicated, install irrigation mains with a minimum cover of 18” based on finished grades. Install irrigation laterals with a minimum cover of 12” based on finished grades.

7. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not leave open trenches or partially filled trenches open overnight.

B. Plastic Pipe:

1. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction.

2. Saw cut plastic pipe. Use a square-in-sawing vice to ensure a square cut. Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation.

3. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent welded joints or slip seal joints. Use only solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s instructions. Contractor shall make arrangements with pipe manufacturer for all necessary field assistance.

4. Make plastic to metal joints with toe nipples, no male adaptors. 5. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 6. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pulling or pressure is applied to the system. 7. Uncoil poly-pipe and insert fitting full depth. Secure poly-pipe to insert fittings with stainless steel

clamps. Double clamp pipe over 1” diameter. 8. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable methods

when pipe installation is not in progress and over all non-working hours.

C. Sprinklers, Fittings, Valves, and Accessories:

1. Install fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, risers, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, except as otherwise indicated.

a. Provide concrete thrust blocks where required at fittings valves and all change of directions.

2. Set sprinkler heads perpendicular to finish grades, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Install pop-up spray heads with polyethylene “cut-off” risers. 4. Obtain Owner’s Representative’s review and acceptance of height for proposed sprinkler heads

and valves prior to installation. 5. Locate sprinkler heads to assure proper coverage of indicated areas. Do not exceed sprinkler

head spacing distances indicated. 6. Install gear-driven sprinklers on 360-degree swing joint assembly as per manufacturer’s

recommendation. 7. Install quick-coupling valves in 10” valve box on 360-degree swing joint assembly as per

manufacturer’s recommendation with stabilizer. 8. Install fittings and accessories as shown or required to complete the system.


9. Install controller as detailed:

a. Coordinate location with Owner. b. Waterproof wire conduit to provide a complete, waterproof, permanent and neat job. c. Ground controller in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

10. Install in-ground control valves in a valve access box as indicated. 11. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level foundation at proper

grade to provide drainage of the access box. 12. Seal threaded connections on pressure side of control valves as per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

D. Control Wiring:

1. Install electric control cable in the piping trenches wherever possible. Place wire in trench adjacent to pipe. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Expansion joints in wire shall be provided at 200-foot intervals by making 5-6 turns of the wire around a piece of 1/2” pipe instead of slack. Where necessary to run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 12”.

2. Provide sufficient slack at site connections at remote control valves in control boxes, and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or splice tot he surface without disconnecting the wires when repair is required.

3. Connect each remote control valve to one station of a controller except as otherwise indicated. 4. Connect remote control valves to a common ground wire system independent of all other

controllers. A separate common neutral wire is required for each controller. 5. Make wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in the field, using 3M

DBY or 3M DBR Direct Bury Splice Kit (or approved equal). 6. Provide tight joints to prevent leakage or water and corrosion build-up on the joint.

E. Interior Plumbing: As per code.

1. Install piping to provide complete drainage of the system, toward the source wherever possible. Provide drain valves at all drainage points on pipes. Cut a pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and installed without springing or forcing. After cutting and reaming, and before assembling, remove interior scale, dust, and foreign matter. Installed pipe shall follow building lines, clearing all doors and other openings. No diagonal piping will be accepted. Install piping to allow installation of 1” thickness pipe installation covering. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of pipe.

2. Insulate piping with 1” thickness of fibrous glass insulation, 35 degree service, with white kraft paper jacket and .001” aluminum foil vapor barrier.

3. All plumbing shall conform to all local codes and regulations.

F. Sleeves: Coordinate with General Contractor.

G. Flushing, Testing, and Adjustment:

1. After sprinkler piping and risers/swing joints are installed and before sprinkler heads are installed, open control valves and flush out the system with full head of water.

2. Perform system testing upon completion of each section. Make necessary repairs and re-test repaired sections as required.

3. Adjust sprinklers after installation for proper and adequate distribution of the water over the coverage pattern. Adjust for the proper arc of coverage.

4. Tighten nozzles on spray type sprinklers after installation. Adjust sprinkler adjusting screw on lateral line or circuit as required for proper radius. Interchange nozzles patterns as needed to give best arc of coverage.


5. Adjust all electric remote control valve flow control stems for system balance. 6. Test and demonstrate the controller by operating appropriate day, hour, and station selection

features as required to automatically start and shut down irrigation cycles to accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions.

3.4 AS-BUILT DRAWING:

A. Furnish accurate reproducible Mylar, or digital file “As-Built” drawings of all components. State the size, manufacturer, model number, part number, size, and exact location of each and every item furnished and installed by this Contractor. Final payment will be withheld until “as-built” has been provided to, and approved by Landscape Architect.

B. Contractor will furnish Owner with 2 bound copies of instruction sheets and parts lists covering all operating equipment.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL:

A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable excavated materials, rock, trash, and debris.

B. Maintain disposal route clear, clean and free of debris.

C. Repair any damage resulting from irrigation system installation.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE:

A. Test and demonstrate to the Owner and Landscape Architect the satisfactory operation of the system free of leaks.

B. Instruct the Owner in the operation of the system, including adjustment of sprinklers, controller(s), valves, and pump controls.

C. Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume operation of the system.

3.7 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:

A. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with the General Contractor, Mechanical/ Electrical Contractors, and all subcontractors, during the design and installation of this system.

B. During the bidding period, the Irrigation Contractor shall inform the Bidding General Contractors of any system items or elements that are required for operation of the system specified herein, that are not being furnished and installed by the Irrigation Contractor.

C. The lawn irrigation system must be in full operation by the time the new sod/seed is placed. It is the intent and mandatory requirement that the sprinklers be installed before the sod/seed and provide the water for the newly placed sod/seed.

D. It is the intent of the Owner to use moderate to heavy motorized lawn mowers to maintain the sod on this project. All sprinkler heads shall safely sustain these loads without failure.

E. Design system for expansion when the second phase building and parking lot are constructed.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1 RDG IA: 2011.505.02

SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Sodding.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F. Amended Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:


1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod and seed. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.


C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf and meadows during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Sod shall be harvested, delivered, and planted within 36 hours. Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips.

C. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.


A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of substantial completion.

1. Sodding:

a. Spring Planting: April 15th – June 15th b. Fall Planting: August 1st – November 1st.

2. Turfgrass Seeding:

a. Spring Planting: April 15th – June 15th. b. Fall Planting: August 1st – November 1st.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE:

A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods:

1. Sodded and Seeded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURFGRASS SEED AND SOD:

A. Turfgrass Sod: Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Turf-type tall fescue, minimum four improved cultivars.

2.2 FERTILIZERS:

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Plant Food Ratio for Fescue Sod: 1:4:2 applied at the rate of two (2) pounds of actual phosphorous per one thousand (1000) square feet.

2.3 PESTICIDES:

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture

until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.


C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.


3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION:

A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers

according to amended soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

a. Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.

3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 SODDING:

A. Lay sod within 36 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:4 with wood pegs equally spaced at 2 anchors per sod strip to

prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE:

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.


2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Sodded areas indicated on landscape plan. Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule sod and watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of sod at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow sodded areas as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain a three (3) inch height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF:

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.7 PESTICIDE APPLICATION:

A. Apply pesticides, if required, and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. Applications shall be considered an addition to the contract price based upon an agreed upon price prior to each application.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply during the maintenance period only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION:

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 1 RDG IA: 2011.505.02

SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY:


1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Herbaceous Perennials. 4. Ornamental Grasses.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Bare-Root Stock: Exterior plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required.

D. Clump: Where three or more young trees were planted in a group and have grown together as a single tree having three or more main stems or trunks.

E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required.

F. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

G. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

H. Multi-Stem: Where three or more main stems arise from the ground from a single root crown or at a point right above the root crown.

I. Amended Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.

K. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.


1.4 SUBMITTALS:


B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. Organic mulch. 2. Aluminum edging.

C. Agronomic Soil Analysis Reports.

D. Plant and Product Certificates:

1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. 2. Manufacturer’s or vendor’s certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. 3. Label data substantiating that planting materials comply with specified requirements.

E. Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in the area of the site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays.

1. Normal seasons for this work as follows:

a. Deciduous Trees and Shrubs: April 1 to June 1 and August 15 to November 15. b. Evergreen Trees and Shrubs: April 1 to June 1 and August 15 to October 1. c. Bare Root Perennials: April 15 to May 30. d. Field Potted or Container Grown Perennials: April 15 to October 15.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work during the warranty period. Submit prior to expiration of required Contractor maintenance period.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."

C. Availability: The Contractor shall have investigated the sources of supply and satisfied himself that he can supply the listed plants in the size, variety, and quality listed and specified before submitting his bid. Failure to take this precaution will not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for furnishing and installing all plant materials in strict accordance with the Contract Documents without additional cost to the Owner.

D. Plants: Provide plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying recommendations and requirements of the current edition of ANSI Z60.1. Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects.


E. Plant Labels: Each separately containerized, or balled and burlapped, plant brought to the site shall be labeled with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Flats of same plants may have one label per flat.

1. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.

F. Observation: Landscape Architect may observe plants either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Landscape Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Landscape Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

B. Trees and Shrubs:

1. Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. 2. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery except as approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other

handling and tying damage. 4. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. 5. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped

stock during delivery and handling. 6. Handle by root ball.

C. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

D. Perennial Plants and Ornamental Grasses:

1. Plants are to be brought to the site the day they are to be installed. If situations arise where earlier delivery cannot be avoided, or if planting is delayed after plants have been delivered, they shall be stored where they can be properly watered, sheltered from direct sunlight, and protected from mechanical damage.

2. If storage needs to be more than 2 days, the plants shall be separated far enough from each other to provide good air circulation to their tops to reduce the risk of fungus.

3. Bare root plants which must be held shall be heeled in where they can be watered as needed. 4. All plants shall be watered thoroughly and allowed to drain prior to planting. 5. While planting, bare root plants must be protected from sun and drying wind by shading with

burlap, landscape fabric, straw, or other breathable material. Plastic is unacceptable. 6. Any dead or damaged plant parts shall be removed from the plants immediately after planting.

E. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.



A. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed according to warranty requirements.

C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant after finish grades are established and before planting lawns unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect.

1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

D. Water: Water is available on-site, provided by the Owner, for use by the installer.

1.8 INITIAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE:

A. Initial inspection of the planting to determine completion of contract work will be made by the Landscape Architect once all items of work as outlined in Part 3 - Execution have been completed.

B. Submit written notice requesting such inspection at least five (5) days prior to the anticipated date.

C. After inspection, the Contractor will be notified in writing by the Landscape Architect of initial acceptance of the work inspected, exclusive of the possible replacement of plants subject to guarantee, or if there are any deficiencies of the requirement for completion of the work.

D. All plants shall be in a live and healthy condition at the time of initial acceptance.

E. Replacement of dead or rejected plants before initial acceptance shall not be considered a part of the warranty and replacement requirement of this section.

1.9 WARRANTY:

A. Warranty trees and shrubs for the duration of one (1) full year after they are initially accepted as defined herein. Plants shall be alive and in good, healthy and flourishing condition of growth at the end of the guarantee period.

1. At the end of the warranty period, final inspection will be made by the Landscape Architect upon written notice requesting such inspection; submit notice to the Landscape Architect at least ten (10) days before the anticipated date of inspection.

2. Any plant required under this Contract that is dead or not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect during the warranty period or at the time of final inspection, shall be removed from the site; these and any missing plants, due to the Landscape Contractor’s negligence, shall be replaced as soon as conditions permit, but during the normal planting season.

B. Replace plants that are observed to be dead or in a badly impaired condition after initial acceptance at no cost to the Owner once during or at the end of the warranty period.

1. One replacement after initial acceptance shall constitute fulfillment of Contractor’s warranty for the particular plant replaced.

2. All replacements shall be plants of the same kind and size as specified in the Plant Schedule. They shall be furnished and planted as specified herein.

3. Plants shall be replaced, staked, mulched, wrapped, fertilized, pruned, and restored to original condition at no cost to Owner.


C. Make all necessary repairs to grades, lawns, and paving required because of plant replacements. Such repairs shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner.

D. Plant replacement cost shall be borne by Contractor except for possible replacements resulting from removal, loss or damage due to occupancy of project in any part, vandalism, civil disobedience, or acts of neglect on the part of others, physical damage by animals, vehicles, fire, etc., or losses due to curtailment of water by local authority, or to “Acts of God”. Floods, tornadoes, winds of hurricane force, and hail are not normal and the damage they do cannot be calculated in a bid.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL:

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper schedule or shown and with branching configuration recommended by of current edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock”, for type and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. Caliper of trees less than four inches (4”) shall be taken six inches (6”) above the ground. Trees four inches (4”) and over shall be measured one foot (1’-0”) above the ground level.

1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Broken or loose balls will not be accepted.

2. Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous trees subject to specified limitations on current edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock”, for container stock.

3. Bare root trees are not acceptable.

C. Deciduous Shrubs: provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by of current edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock” for type and height of shrub required. Plants shall be measured before pruning with branches in normal position. Height and spread specified refers to main body of plant and not from tip to tip of branches or roots.

1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous shrubs. They shall be dug with firm natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Broken or loose balls will not be accepted.

2. Container grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations of current edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock”, for container grown stock.

3. Bare root shrubs are not acceptable.

D. Coniferous and Broadleaf Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicated minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad upright, and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well-balanced form. Comply with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. Height and spread specified referred to main body of plant and not from tip to tip of branches or roots.

1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant.


2. Container grown coniferous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations of current edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock”, for container grown stock.

3. Bare root trees are not acceptable.

E. All plant materials shall be of the highest quality.

2.2 PERENNIAL PLANTS AND ORNAMENTAL GRASSES:

A. Comply with current edition ANSI Z60.1

B. As specified and listed on the drawings.

1. Container-grown plants -- grown to a specified size in a container. 2. Bare root plants -- purchased free of any growing medium regardless of growing method.

a. Bare root plants will not be accepted as substitutes for specified container grown plants.

3. Field-potted plants -- field-grown plants where are potted for delivery as they are dug from the field.

2.3 SOIL AMENDMENTS:

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

B. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

C. Limestone: Ground agriculture limestone; provided in original packaging, legibly labeled with fineness and liming ability shown.

2.4 FERTILIZER:

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Ratio for Trees and Shrubs: 6:3:0. 2. Ratio for Perennial Plants: 0.5:2:3.

2.5 MULCHES:

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Shredded hardwood bark.

2.6 ALUMINUM LANDSCAPE EDGING:

A. Aluminum Landscape Edging: 3/16” x 4” (depth) aluminum landscape edging. Material to be the following, or the equivalent. Contractor to submit Product Information & Details to Landscape Architect prior to installation for Approval.

1. Type: Permaloc Cleanline Series 2. Finish: Mill Finish 3. Accessories: Heavy-duty 12” stakes where applicable.


2.7 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS:

A. Stakes and Guys:

1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Provide stakes similar or equal to steel farm fence posts. Steel fence posts shall be green vinyl coated or painted black with rust inhibiting primer. All stakes shall be the same.

2. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, No. 9 gage galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted.

3. Hose Chafing Guards: Black nylon straps w/ grommets per industry standards; tie guy wire through grommets.

4. Guy Cables: 5-strand, 3/16-inch diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.

5. Anchors: Steel screw type anchors, 24 inches long, 3 inch plates.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS:

A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4-inch wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance.


3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.

3.3 SOIL TEST – PERENNIALS AND ORNAMENTAL GRASSES:

A. Agronomic Soil Tests: Collect 20 samples from the top 12 inches of the soil surface. Take soil samples which are representative of the landscape and soil conditions where perennials will be planted. Remove surface vegetation from surface of sample sites prior to sampling.


B. Test representative samples for pH, organic matter content, pounds per acre available P205 (phosphate), and pounds per acre available K20 (potash).

C. Submit soil analysis reports to Landscape Architect seven (7) days prior to plant bed preparation.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS;

A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock.

B. Subsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill.

C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

3.5 DRAINAGE TEST:

A. Shrubs: Randomly select a representative number of shrub plant pits in each shrub planting area and test for drainage prior to planting.

B. Trees: Test a representative number of tree plant pits for drainage -- approximately 10%.

C. Fill each selected plant pit with water, observe and let stand for twenty-four (24) hours.

D. Notification: Report test results to the Architect before proceeding with planting.

E. Plant Bed Drainage for perennials and ornamental grasses: Following the recommended soil preparation, perform a percolation test in each bed to assure proper drainage. This test shall be performed by digging a flat-bottomed hole 12 inches in diameter the depth of the prepared soil and filling it with water. After the water has drained from the hole, it shall be filled again and the drainage recorded. If the second draining takes an excess of one hour, additional soil preparation or drainage tile may be required.

3.6 PERENNIAL PLANT AND ORNAMENTAL GRASSES BED PREPARATION:

A. Strip and remove surface vegetation from plant bed areas.

B. Prepare plant bed as specified. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Spread amended soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of amended soil and fertilizer over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of amended soil.

b. Reduce elevation of amended soil one and one-half (1-1/2) inches to allow for soil thickness of sod.

c. Delay mixing fertilizer with soil if planting will not proceed within three (3) days.

C. Finish grade and provide a uniform, settled plant bed no more than 2 inches below the adjacent PCC sidewalk plant bed edge.

D. Shape plant bed to drain as shown on drawings.


E. Add commercial grade fertilizer and other plant bed amendments to each plant bed as follows:

1. Commercial grade fertilizer at a rate of 3 lbs. of K20 per 1000 sq. ft. (plant food ration 0.5:2:3 applied at 3 lbs. K20 per 1000 sq. ft. yields 2 lbs. of P205 and 0.5 lbs. of N per 1000 sq. ft.)

2. Agricultural limestone at a rate to be determined by soil test. Lime will be applied to adjust bedding soil pH range to 5.5 0 6.5. Payment for labor and material based on unit price bid.

F. Till fertilizer and lime into the top six inches (6”) of the planting bed.

G. After fertilization, rake plant beds smooth, shape plant bed contour to drain, and prepare the bed surface for planting.

H. Install aluminum landscape edging (see Products). Lock individual units to each other; stake where necessary.

3.7 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING:

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.

B. Prepare plant bed as specified. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Spread amended soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of amended soil and fertilizer over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of amended soil.

b. Reduce elevation of amended soil one and one-half (1-1/2) inches to allow for soil thickness of sod.

c. Delay mixing fertilizer with soil if planting will not proceed within three (3) days.

C. Finish grade and provide a uniform, settled plant bed no more than 2 inches below the adjacent PCC sidewalk plant bed edge.

D. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball flush with adjacent finish grades.

1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and completely from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

2. Place backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.

E. Fertilize trees and shrubs after placing backfill, prior to final watering and before mulching. Apply fertilizer at the following rates:

1. Large shade trees (4" caliper or larger): Two (2) pounds per inch of caliper. 2. Small trees (less than 4" caliper): One (1) pound per inch of caliper. 3. Shrubs: One-quarter (1/4) pound per foot height.

F. Add pre-emergent to planting bed before mulching. Pre-emergent product to be ‘Snapshot’ or approved equivalent.


G. Organic Mulching: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

H. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping. Wrap trees of 2-inch caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling.

3.8 PERENNIAL AND ORNAMENTAL GRASS PLANTING:

A. Prior to planting, the Landscape Architect will inspect the site. Any unsatisfactory conditions shall be corrected prior to planting. No weeds should be present in the beds at planting time.

1. Herbaceous perennials may be planted according to specified schedule. 2. Planting shall be done by experienced employees under the supervision of a qualified supervisor. 3. Plants shall be located as designated on the plan.

B. Nursery Stock:

1. Container-grown stock shall be left in its container until the soils has been prepared and approved by the Landscape Architect. Upon removal from its container, the root system of each plant shall be inspected by the contractor for any sign of root decay or harmful soil insects. Affected plants should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect and the installation stopped until healthy plants can be procured. If the roots appear healthy, the root ball should be scored from top to bottom on four sides and across the bottom in an “X”. These cuts shall then be pulled open, the plant set into the planting hole, and the soil firmed around the root ball. Set plants at the same depth they occupied in their containers.

2. Field-grown and potted stock shall be set into the planting bed at the same depth as it has been growing in the field.

3. Bare root stock should be planted at a depth correct for its genus and species, according to current edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock” Standards.

4. Plant Spacing: As specified on the drawings and in the plant schedule.

C. Water each plant as planted to settle soil and prevent wilting.

D. After a bed or section of a large bed has been planted, the soil immediately surrounding each plant shall be watered to its saturation point to ensure the collapse of any air pockets which would be harmful to the plants. When the entire bed has been planted, it shall be watered with the equivalent of a 1 inch rainfall to prevent dry soil from soaking water away from the newly set plants.

E. Add pre-emergent to planting bed before mulching. Pre-emergent product to be ‘Snapshot’ or approved equivalent.

F. Mulch entire plant bed; pull mulch away from plant stems and crowns of plants to minimize risk of rot and rodent damage.

1. Minimum mulch depth -- two inches (2”); maximum mulch depth -- three inches (3”).

3.9 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING:

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Remove and replace mis-formed stock resulting from the need for excessive pruning.

C. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character.


3.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE:

A. Tree and Shrub Maintenance: Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.

B. Perennial Plant and Ornamental Grass Maintenance: The landscape contractor is responsible for maintenance of perennials from the time they are brought onto the job site until they are planted and accepted.

1. Plants shall be watered often enough to prevent wilting prior to planting. After planting, they shall be watered initially to settle the soil, then to prevent wilting and to allow them to become established on the site.

2. The beds shall be free of weeds at planting time and shall be maintained weed free by the contractor until the planting is accepted.

3. Make periodic visits to project site to review plant conditions and maintenance operations being performed by Owner. Contractor to notify Owner in writing of any observed deficiencies affecting the health of the plants.

4. Should insects or diseases attack the plants after installation and prior to acceptance of the planting, appropriate pesticides shall be properly applied to correct the situation.

5. The beds should be checked regularly for soil setting which may expose the rootballs or otherwise endanger the health of the planting. Should this occur, the contractor shall correct the settling problems.

6. Newly planted herbaceous perennials may be heaved out of the ground by alternate freezes and thaws. Should this occur prior to acceptance of the planting, the contractor shall re-set those affected plants.

7. Any noted defects, such as reversions, errant growth or color not typical for the species or cultivar, shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect. The recommendations of the Landscape Architect shall be followed to correct the situation. Recommendations may include removal of the entire plant.

C. Maintenance after Initial Acceptance of the plantings will be performed by the Owner.

3.11 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION:

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

3.12 DISPOSAL: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 AMENDED SOIL 32 93 01 - 1 RDG IA: 2011.505.02

SECTION 32 93 01 – AMENDED SOIL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:


1. This part of the Specification includes all labor, materials, equipment, and supervision required to prepare perennial plant beds and to provide, furnish and install amended soil.

2. This section includes the specifications for perennial plant bed preparation, soil amendment materials and the preparation and installation of amended soil.

1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

A. Basis of Measurement: The Engineer will measure the surface area of installed AMENDED SOIL and based upon the required depth of finished AMENDED SOIL, the Engineer will compute the quantity. Unit of measure will be CUBIC YARDS (CY) of installed amended soil.

B. Basis of Payment: Payment for AMENDED SOIL includes all labor, materials, equipment, and supervision required for plant bed preparation and providing furnishing and installing amended soil.

C. Unit Price for AMENDED SOIL will include, but may not be limited to, plant bed preparation, furnishing all amended soil materials, mixing and installing amended soil at locations shown on the Drawings


A. General: Ship materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. Obtain any necessary permits for this work and pay any fees required for permits.

B. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer’s certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.

C. Substitutions: If specified materials are not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability, together with proposal for use of equivalent material.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Topsoil samples.

B. Sample of amended soil materials.


A. Delivery: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer.

B. Storage and Handling: Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL:

A. Import required topsoil.

B. Topsoil shall be dry, loose, and free of debris.

PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 AMENDED SOIL 32 93 01 - 2 RDG IA: 2011.505.02

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS:

A. Organic matter: A product of peat moss, compost, or locally available organic waste.

B. Organic matter should be odor free and free from debris, weed seeds, and insects or diseases which may be harmful to plants, animals and humans.

C. Sand: Concrete sand, having a fineness modulus (FM) between 1.8 and 2.5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING OF AMENDED SOIL:

A. Mix prior to placing.

B. Percentage by Volume:

1. Topsoil: 60 percent. 2. Organic Matter: 30 percent. 3. Sand: 10 percent.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF AMENDED SOIL:

A. Plant bed locations as shown on Drawings.

B. Place material in 6” lifts.

C. Firm each lift with a hand-held, vibratory, plate compactor to settle the amended soil.

D. Provide a settled, amended soil depth as shown the Drawings.

E. Prior to planting plant beds, the Engineer will observe and approve the amended soil installation.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEAN-UP:

A. Make all necessary repairs to grades, lawns, and paving required because of plant bed and amended soil preparation and installation. Such repairs will be done at no extra cost to the Owner.

B. Remove all excess materials and debris from the job site.


PACIFIC SPRINGS VILLAGE PATIO HOMES OMAHA, NEBRASKA 2011.192.01 PROFESSIONAL SEALS - 1

PROFESSIONAL SEALS – END OF PROJECT MANUAL Architect ................................................ RDG Planning & Design

900 Farnam on the Mall, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68102-5089 402.392.0133 Contact: Scott F. Pfeifer, AIA

I, Scott F. Pfeifer, AIA, am the Coordinating Professional on the Pacific Springs Village Patio Homes project.

Civil Engineer ........................................ Ehrhart Griffin & Associates 3552 Farnam Street Omaha, NE 68131 402.561.0631 Contact: Dan Dolezal, P.E.

Landscape Architect .............................. RDG Planning & Design 900 Farnam on the Mall, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68102-5089 402.392.0133 Contacts: Dolores D. Silkworth, P.E. Hans Klein-Hewett, PLA, ASLA (Primary Contact)

Structural Engineer ............................... Thompson, Dreessen & Dorner, Inc. 10836 Old Mill Road Omaha, NE 68154 402.330.8860 Contact: Troy Nissen, P.E.

6/24/2013

6/24/2013